Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

those for whom it is not

  • 1 ὁσία

    ὁσί-α, [dialect] Ion. [full] ὁσίη, , (fem. of ὅσιος)
    A divine law, οὐδ' ὁσίη κακὰ ῥάπτειν ἀλλήλοισιν it is against the law of God and nature to.., Od.16.423, cf. 22.412, Pi.P.9.36, Call.Aet.3.1.5 ; τοῖσι οὐδὲ κτήνεα ὁσίη θύειν ἐστί those for whom it is not lawful, Hdt.2.45 ; ὅσον.. ὁ. ἐστὶ λέγειν ib. 171 ;

    ἐκ πάσης ὁ. h.Merc. 470

    ; ὁσίης πλέον εἰπεῖν more than law allows, Emp.4.7 ; νομίσας πολλὴν ὁ. τοῦ πράγματος holding the thing fully sanctioned, Ar.Pl. 682 ;

    οὔτε θεοὺς οὔθ' ὁσίαν οὔτ' ἄλλ' οὐδὲν ἐποιήσατ' ἐμποδών D.21.104

    ; τῶν ἱερῶν ὀσία παντί all may share lawfully in the rites, Berl.Sitzb.1927.158 ([place name] Cyrene): personified Ὁσία, Righteousness, E.Ba. 370 (lyr.).
    II the service or worship owed by man to God, rites, offerings, etc., κἀγὼ τῆς ὁσίης ἐπιβήσομαι ἧς περ Ἀπόλλων I will enter into (enjoyment of) the same worship as A., h.Merc.173 ; ὣς ὁσίη γένετο the rites were established, h.Ap. 237 ; ὁσίη κρεάων the rite of the flesh-offering, h.Merc.130: so without a gen., offering,

    λιτῇ προσγελάσαις ὁσίῃ AP9.91

    (Arch.Jun.).
    2 funeral rites, last honours paid to the dead,

    τὴν ὁ. ἀποπληροῦν Iamb.VP30.184

    .
    III prov., ὁσίας ἕκατι for form's sake, Lat. dicis causa, E.IT 1461 ;

    ὁσίας ἕνεκα Eub.110

    , Ephipp.15.4 ; so ὁσίᾳ (or Ὁσίᾳ)

    δίδωμ' ἔπος τόδε E. IT 1161

    . ( οὐκ ὀσία Berl.Sitzb. l. c.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁσία

  • 2 ὅς

    ὅς, ἥ, ὅ
    as relative pron. who, which, what, that (Hom.+). On its use s. B-D-F §293–97; 377–80; Rydbeck 98–118; W-S. §24; Rob. 711–26, and for ancient Gk. in gener. Kühner-G. II 399ff; Schwyzer II 639–41.
    As a general rule, the relative pron. agrees in gender and number w. the noun or pron. to which it refers (i.e. its antecedent); its case is determined by the verb, noun, or prep. that governs it: ὁ ἀστήρ, ὸ̔ν εἶδον Mt 2:9. ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὅν ἐγὼ καταγγέλλω ὑμῖν Ac 17:3. Ἰουδαῖον, ᾧ (sc. ἦν) ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 13:6. ὁ Ἰουδαῖος …, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος Ro 2:29. Ἰσραηλίτης, ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν J 1:47. οὗτος, περὶ οὗ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα Lk 9:9 and very oft.
    A demonstrative pron. is freq. concealed within the relative pron.:
    α. in such a way that both pronouns stand in the same case: ὅς the one who ὅς οὐ λαμβάνει Mt 10:38; sim. Mk 4:9; 9:40 (the three w. implied condition). οὗ of the one whose J 18:26. to the one to whom Ro 6:16. ὅν the one whom (or someth. sim.) Mk 15:12; J 1:45. οἷς to those for whom Mt 20:23. οὕς those whom Mk 3:13; J 5:21.that which, what Mt 10:27.—A prep. governing the relative belongs in certain pass. to the (omitted) demonstr. pron. alone: παρʼ ὅ Ro 12:3; Gal 1:8; ὑπὲρ ὅ (ἅ) 1 Cor 10:13; 2 Cor 12:6; Phlm 21; πρὸς ἅ 2 Cor 5:10; εἰς ὅν J 6:29. In others it must be added to both pronouns: ἐν ᾧ in that in which 2 Cor 11:12; 1 Pt 2:12; 3:16 (these passages in 1 Pt may be classed under 1kγ also). ἐν οἷς Phil 4:11. ὑπὲρ οὑ because of that for which 1 Cor 10:30. ἀφʼ ὧν from the persons from whom 2 Cor 2:3.—The much disputed pass. ἑταῖρε, ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 would belong here if we were to supply the words necessary to make it read about as follows: friend, (are you misusing the kiss) for that (purpose) for which you are here? (Wlh.; EKlostermann) or thus: in connection with that (=the purposes), for which (=for the realization of which) you have appeared (do you kiss me)? (Rdm.2 78). Friend, are you here for this purpose? FRehkopf, ZNW 52, ’61, 109–15. But s. βב and iβ below.
    β. But the two pronouns can also stand in different cases; in such instances the demonstr. pron. is nearly always in the nom. or acc.
    א. in the nom. οὗ one whose Ac 13:25. ὧν those whose Ro 4:7 (Ps 31:1). ᾧ the one to or for whom Lk 7:43; 2 Pt 1:9. οἷς those to whom Mt 19:11; Ro 15:21 (Is 52:15). ὅ that (nom.) which (acc.) Mt 13:12; 25:29; 26:13; Mk 11:23; Lk 12:3. Likew. ἅ Lk 12:20. ὅν he whom J 3:34; 4:18; Ac 10:21. ἐφʼ ὅν the one about whom Hb 7:13.
    ב. in the acc. ὧν the things of which J 13:29. the one (in) whom 2 Ti 1:12. So also w. a prep.: ἐν ᾧ anything by which Ro 14:21. ἐν οἷς things in which 2 Pt 2:12. ἐφʼ ὅ that upon which Lk 5:25. περὶ ὧν the things of which Ac 24:13. ἐφʼ οἷς from the things of which Ro 6:21 (this passage perh. uses a commercial metaphor, for pap s. Mayser II/2, 434f §121). εἰς ὸ̔ν the one in whom Ro 10:14a.—So Mt 26:50 (s. bα above), if the words to be supplied are about as follows: friend, (do that) for which you have come! (so ESchwartz, ByzZ 25, 1925, 154f; EOwen, JTS 29, 1928, 384–86; WSpiegelberg, ZNW 28, 1929, 341–43; FZorell, VD 9, 1929, 112–16; sim. PMaas, Byz.-Neugriech. Jahrb. 8, ’31, 99; 9, ’32, 64; WEltester: OCullmann Festschr., ’62, 70–91; but s. iβ end.—S. Jos., Bell. 2, 615 at πάρειμι 1a).
    ג. Only in isolated instances does the demonstr. pron. to be supplied stand in another case: οὗ = τούτῳ, οὗ in him of whom Ro 10:14b. παρʼ ὧν = τούτοις, παρʼ ὧν Lk 6:34.
    Constructions peculiar in some respect
    α. The pleonastic use of the pers. pron. after ὅς (Mlt. 94f; B-D-F §297) γυνὴ ἧς εἶχεν τὸ θυγάτριον αὐτῆς Mk 7:25 is found in older Gk. (Hyperid., Euxen. 3 ὧν … τούτων.—Kühner-G. II 433f), and is not unknown in later Gk. (POxy 117, 15), but above all is suggested by Semitic languages (LXX; GrBar 2:1; Thackeray 46; JHudson, ET 53, ’41/42, 266f); the omission of αὐτῆς in the v.l. is in line w. Gk. usage. οὗ τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ Mt 3:12; Lk 3:17. οὗ … τῶν ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ Mk 1:7; Lk 3:16. οὗ τῷ μώλωπι αὐτοῦ 1 Pt 2:24 v.l. οὗ καὶ πολλὰ αὐτοῦ συγγράματα EpilMosq 2. In a quot. ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται … ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 = Am 9:12. οὗ ἡ πνοὴ αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 21:9. Esp. freq. in Rv 3:8; 7:2, 9; 9:11 v.l.; 13:8, 12; 20:8.
    β. constructions ‘ad sensum’
    א. a relative in the sing. refers to someth. in the pl. οὐρανοῖς … ἐξ οὗ (οὐρανοῦ) Phil 3:20.
    ב. a relative in the pl. refers to a sing. (Jdth 4:8 γερουσία, οἵ) πλῆθος πολύ …, οἳ ἦλθον Lk 6:17f. κατὰ πόλιν πᾶσαν, ἐν αἷς Ac 15:36. Cp. ἤδη δευτέραν ἐπιστολήν, ἐν αἷς (i.e. ἐν ταῖς δυσὶν ἐπιστ.) 2 Pt 3:1.
    ג. the relative conforms to the natural gender rather than the grammatical gender of its antecedent noun τέκνα μου, οὕς Gal 4:19; cp. 2 J 1; Phlm 10. ἔθνη, οἵ Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); cp. 26:17. παιδάριον, ὅς J 6:9. θηρίον, ὅς Rv 13:14. ὀνόματα, οἵ 3:4 v.l. γενεᾶς σκολιᾶς, ἐν οἷς Phil 2:15. W. ref. to Christ, τὴν κεφαλήν, ἐξ οὗ Col 2:19.
    Attraction (or assimilation) of the relative. Just as in Hdt. and freq. Att., ins, pap, LXX, the simple relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ is somet. attracted to the case of its antecedent, even though the relationship of the relative within its own clause would demand a different case.
    α. In most instances it is the acc. of the rel. that is attracted to the gen. or dat. of the antecedent: περὶ πράγματος οὗ ἐὰν αἰτήσωνται Mt 18:19. τῆς διαθήκης ἧς ὁ θεὸς διέθετο Ac 3:25. Cp. Mt 24:50b; Mk 7:13; Lk 2:20; 3:19; 5:9; 9:43; 15:16; J 4:14; 7:31; 15:20; 17:5; 21:10; Ac 1:1; 2:22; 22:10; 1 Cor 6:19; 2 Cor 1:6; 10:8, 13; Eph 2:10; 2 Th 1:4; Jd 15 al.—When the antecedent is an understood but unexpressed demonstr. pron. (s. b, beg.) that would stand in the gen. or dat., the acc. of a relative pron. can be attracted to this gen. or dat.: οὐδὲν ὧν ἑώρακαν is really οὐδὲν τούτων ἃ ἑώρακαν Lk 9:36 (Schwyzer II 641); ἅ takes on the case of τούτων which, in turn, is omitted (so already Soph., Pla., et al.).—23:14, 41; Ac 8:24; 21:19, 24; 22:15; 25:11; 26:16; Ro 15:18; 1 Cor 7:1; Eph 3:20; Hb 5:8. ὧν = τούτων, οὕς J 17:9; 2 Cor 12:17. οἷς = τούτοις, ἅ Lk 24:25.
    β. The dat. of the relative is less frequently attracted (B-D-F §294, 2; Rob. 717) ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς (=ᾗ) ἀνελήμφθη Ac 1:22 (cp. Lev 23:15; 25:50; Bar 1:19); Eph 1:6; 4:1; 1 Ti 4:6 v.l.; κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ = κατέν. τοῦ θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστ. Ro 4:17. διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα 2 Cor 1:4.
    γ. In relative clauses that consist of subject, predicate, and copula, the relative pron. somet. agrees in gender and number not w. the noun to which it refers, but w. the predicate if it is the subj. and, conversely, w. the subj. if it is the pred. of its own clause: πνεύματι …, ὅς ἐστιν ἀρραβών Eph 1:14 v.l. τῷ σπέρματί σου, ὅς ἐστιν Χριστός Gal 3:16. τὴν μάχαιραν τοῦ πνεύματος, ὅ ἐστιν ῥῆμα θεοῦ Eph 6:17.—Rv 4:5; 5:8.
    δ. Inverse attraction occurs when the relative pronoun attracts its antecedent to its own case (as early as Hom.; also Soph., Oed. Rex 449; s. Kühner-G. II 413; Schwyzer II 641; B-D-F §295; Rob. 717f); τὸν ἄρτον ὸ̔ν κλῶμεν, οὐχὶ κοινωνία … ἐστιν; = ὁ ἄρτος ὅν … 1 Cor 10:16. λίθον, ὸ̔ν ἀπεδοκίμασαν … οὗτος ἐγενήθη (Ps 117:22) Mt 21:42; Mk 12:10; Lk 20:17; 1 Pt 2:7 v.l.—παντὶ ᾧ ἐδόθη πολύ, πολὺ ζητηθήσεται παρʼ αὐτοῦ Lk 12:48. ὅρκον, ὸ̔ν ὤμοσεν (=μνησθῆναι ὅρκου ὅν) 1:73 (s. W-S. §24, 7 note). τοὺς λίθους, οὓς εἶδες, ἀποβεβλημένους, οὗτοι … ἐφόρεσαν Hs 9, 13, 3. Cp. 1J 2:25.
    ε. Attraction can, as in earlier Gk. (Thu. 2, 70, 4), fail to take place when the relative clause is more distinctly separated fr. its antecedent by additional modifiers of the noun and by the importance attaching to the content of the relative clause itself (B-D-F §294, 1; Rob. 714f): τῆς σκηνῆς τῆς ἀληθινῆς, ἣν ἔπηξεν ὁ κύριος, οὐκ ἄνθρωπος Hb 8:2. But s. also Mk 13:19; J 2:22; 4:5; Ac 8:32; 1 Ti 4:3; Tit 1:2; Phlm 10; Hb 9:7; Rv 1:20.
    The noun which is the antecedent of a relative clause can be incorporated into the latter
    α. without abbreviating the constr. and without attraction of the case: ᾗ οὐ δοκεῖτε ὥρᾳ = τῇ ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ δοκ. Mt 24:44; cp. Lk 12:40; 17:29, 30. ἃ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώματα 24:1. ὸ̔ ἐποίησεν σημεῖον J 6:14. ὸ̔ θέλω ἀγαθόν Ro 7:19.
    β. w. abbreviation, in that a prep. normally used twice is used only once: ἐν ᾧ κρίματι κρίνετε κριθήσεσθε = ἐν τῷ κρίματι, ἐν ᾧ κρίνετε, κριθήσεσθε Mt 7:2a. Cp. vs. 2b; Mk 4:24. ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ = ἐν τῷ τόπῳ ἐν ᾧ ἦν J 11:6. καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον = κατὰ τὸν τρόπον, καθʼ ὅν Ac 15:11.
    γ. w. a change in case, due mostly to attraction
    א. of the relative pron. περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίησεν πονηρῶν = περὶ πάντων πονηρῶν, ἃ ἐπ. Lk 3:19. περὶ πασῶν ὧν εἶδον δυνάμεων = περὶ πασῶν δυνάμεων, ἃς εἶδον 19:37. αἰτίαν … ὧν ἐγὼ ὑπενόουν πονηρῶν Ac 25:18.—The dat. of the relative is also attracted to other cases: ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας = ἄχρι τῆς ἡμέρας, ᾖ Mt 24:38; Lk 1:20; 17:27; Ac 1:2. ἀφʼ ἧς ἡμέρας Col 1:6, 9.
    ב. of the noun to which the rel. refers: ὸ̔ν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφάλισα Ἰωάννην, οὗτος ἠγέρθη = Ἰωάννης ὸ̔ν κτλ. Mk 6:16 εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε τύπον διδαχῆς = τῷ τύπῳ τῆς διδαχῆς εἰς ὸ̔ν παρεδόθητε Ro 6:17.
    δ. The analysis is doubtful in passages like περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης λόγων = περὶ τῶν λόγων οὓς κατηχήθης or τῶν λόγων, περὶ ὧν κατηχήθης Lk 1:4. ἄγοντες παρʼ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν Μνάσωνι Ac 21:16 must acc. to the sense = ἄγοντες πρὸς Μνάσωνα, ἵνα ξενισθῶμεν παρʼ αὐτῷ. S. B-D-F §294, 5; Rob. 719.
    The prep. can be omitted before the relative pron. if it has already been used before the antecedent noun: ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ὧ.) Ac 1:21. εἰς τὸ ἔργον ὅ (=εἰς ὅ) 13:2. ἀπὸ πάντων ὧν (=ἀφʼ ὧν) vs. 38. Cp. 26:2. ἐν τῷ ποτηρίῳ ᾧ (=ἐν ᾧ) Rv 18:6.
    The neut. is used
    α. in explanations, esp. of foreign words and of allegories: ὅ ἐστιν which or that is, which means: βασιλεὺς Σαλήμ, ὅ ἐστιν βασιλεὺς εἰρήνης Hb 7:2; cp. Mt 27:33; Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; 15:42. Also ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον Mt 1:23; Mk 5:41; Ac 4:36; cp. J 1:38, 41f. ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενος κρανίου τόπος Mk 15:22 v.l. (for μεθερμηνευόμενον). τόπος, ὸ̔ λέγεται, Ἑβραϊστὶ Γολγοθά J 19:17.—S. also αὐλῆς, ὅ ἐστιν πραιτώριον Mk 15:16. λεπτὰ δὺο, ὅ ἐστιν κοδράντης 12:42. τοῦ σώματος αὐτοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἡ ἐκκλησία Col 1:24. πλεονέκτης ὅ ἐστιν εἰδωλολάτρης Eph 5:5. τὴν ἀγάπην ὅ ἐστιν σύνδεσμος τῆς τελειότητος Col 3:14.—B-D-F §132, 2.
    β. when the relative pron. looks back upon a whole clause: τοῦτον τ. Ἰησοῦν ἀνέστησεν ὁ θεός, οὗ πάντες ἡμεῖς ἐσμεν μάρτυρες Ac 2:32; cp. 3:15; 11:30; 26:9f; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29; 1 Pt 2:8; Rv 21:8.
    γ. ὅ is to be understood as an obj. acc. and gains its content fr. what immediately follows in these places (s. W-S. §24, 9; Rob. 715): ὸ̔ ἀπέθανεν, τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀπέθανεν ἐφάπαξ = τὸν θάνατον, ὸ̔ν ἀπέθανεν κτλ. what he died, i.e. the death he suffered, he suffered for sin Ro 6:10a; cp. vs. 10b. ὸ̔ νῦν ζῶ ἐν σαρκί the life that I now live in the flesh Gal 2:20.
    The relative is used w. consecutive or final mng. (result or purpose): τίς ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου, ὸ̔ς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν; who has known the mind of the Lord, so that he could instruct him? 1 Cor 2:16 (cp. Is 40:13). ἄξιός ἐστιν ᾧ παρέξῃ τοῦτο he is worthy that you should grant him this Lk 7:4. ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου …, ὸ̔ς κατασκευάσει Mt 11:10. ἔπεμψα Τιμόθεον …, ὸ̔ς ὑμᾶς ἀναμνήσει 1 Cor 4:17. ἔχετε μεθʼ ἑαυτῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐργάσεσθε τὸ καλόν 21:2.
    taking the place of the interrogative pron.
    α. in indirect questions (Soph., Oed. Rex 1068; Thu. 1, 136, 4; Attic ins of 411 B.C. in Meisterhans3-Schw.; pap [Witkowski 30, 7]; oft. Joseph. [Schmidt 369]; Just., D. 44, 4 διʼ ἧς ὁδοῦ). ὸ̔ ἐγὼ ποιῶ what I am doing J 13:7. ἃ λέγουσιν 1 Ti 1:7 (Just., D. 9, 1 οὐ γὰρ οἶδας ὸ̔ λέγεις).—J 18:21.
    β. NT philology has generally dismissed the proposition that ὅς is used in direct questions (Mlt. 93; B-D-F §300, 2; Radermacher2 78; PMaas [see 1bβב above]). An unambiguous example of it is yet to be found. Even the ins on a goblet in Dssm., LO 100ff [LAE 125–31], ET 33, 1922, 491–93 leaves room for doubt. Therefore also the translation of ἐφʼ ὸ̔ πάρει Mt 26:50 as ‘what are you here for?’ (so Goodsp., Probs. 41–43; similarly, as early as Luther, later Dssm.; JWilson, ET 41, 1930, 334) has been held suspect. S. ZNW 52, ’61, 109ff.—Rob. 725 doubts the interrogative here, but Mlt-Turner 50 inclines toward it. If further proof for interrogative use of ὅς can be found, lit.-crit. considerations (s. vv. 14–16) invite attention to the v.l. (s. Tdf. app.) ἐφʼ ᾦ, a combination used in commercial documents (PGrenf II, 17, 2; 5; Mayser II/1 p. 215); the colloquial use suggests the sense: What deal did you make?—See also 1bβב above.
    combined w. particles
    α. with ἄν (ἐάν), s. ἄν I. b.
    β. with γέ (s. γέ aβ and cp. PFlor 370, 9) Ro 8:32.
    γ. w. δήποτε whatever J 5:3(4) v.l. (the vv.ll. vary betw. οἵῳ and ᾧ, δηποτοῦν and δήποτε).
    δ. w. καί who also Mk 3:19; Lk 6:13f; 7:49 al.
    ε. with περ = ὅσπερ, ἥπερ, ὅπερ (TestSol, TestAbr; TestJob 7:13; JosAs 14:12; GrBar; ApcSed 2:1; Jos., Ant. 2, 277, Vi. 95; apolog. [exc. Mel.]) just the one who Mk 15:6 v.l. ὅπερ which indeed Ox 840, 35; ISm 4:1. πάντα ἅπερ whatever GPt 11:45.
    used w. preposition (s. also above: 1bα; 1bβב; 1eβ,γ; 1f, and s. Johannessohn, Präp. 382f [ind.]), whereby a kind of conjunction is formed:
    α. with ἀντί: ἀνθʼ ὧν (s. ἀντί 4) because Lk 1:20; 19:44; Ac 12:23; 2 Th 2:10; therefore Lk 12:3.
    β. w. εἰς: εἰς ὅ to this end 2 Th 1:11.
    γ. with ἐν: ἐν οἷς connects w. the situation described in what precedes under which circumstances = under these circumstances Lk 12:1; Ac 24:18 v.l.; 26:12. So also perh. ἐν ᾧ 1 Pt 1:6; 2:12; 3:16, 19; 4:4. S. also ἐν 7 and cp. 1bα above.
    δ. w. ἐπί: ἐφʼ ᾧ (normally, ‘for which’: Plut., Cimon 483 [8, 6] Cimon receives honors in requital for his generous deed [cp. the pl. ἐφʼ οἷς IPriene 114, 22 of honors heaped on a gymnasiarch for his numerous contributions]; cp. Plut., Mor. 522e and Diog. L. 7, 173. Conversely Plut., Aratus 1048 [44, 4]: A. suffers some dishonor ‘for what’ he did to one of his associates) has freq. been interpreted=ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for the reason that, because Ro 5:12 (lit. on ἁμαρτία 3a); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for 4:10. But a commercial metaphor may find expression in the first 3 passages cited here; s. ἐπί 6c. Difft. on Ro 5:12 JFitzmyer, NTS 39, ’93, 321–39; also comm. (Anchor), ad loc.: ‘with the result that, so that’
    ε. οὗ χάριν therefore Lk 7:47.
    ζ. in indications of time: ἀφʼ ἧς (s. ἀπό 2bγ and cp. BGU 252, 9 [98 A.D.]) from the time when; since Lk 7:45; Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4; Hs 8, 6, 6 v.l.; as soon as, after 8, 1, 4.—ἀφʼ οὗ (s. ἀπό 2bγ) when once, since Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18. ἄχρι οὗ (s. ἄχρι 1bα) until (the time when) Ac 7:18; Ro 11:25; 1 Cor 11:26; Gal 3:19. Also ἕως οὗ until Mt 1:25; 13:33; 14:22; 17:9; Lk 13:21; D 11:6 al. μέχρις οὗ until Mk 13:30; Gal 4:19.—On the gen. οὗ as an adv. of place s. it as a separate entry.
    Demonstrative pron. this (one) (Hom.+; prose of Hdt. et al. [Kühner-G. II 228f]; pap, LXX).
    ὸ̔ς δέ but he (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatris 22; PRyl 144, 14 [38 A.D.]) Mk 15:23; J 5:11 v.l. Mostly
    ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δέ the one … the other (Hippocr.+; very oft. in later wr.; POxy 1189, 7 [c. 117 A.D.]; SibOr 3, 654) the masc. in var. cases of sing. and pl. Mt 22:5; Lk 23:33; Ac 27:44; Ro 14:5; 1 Cor 11:21; 2 Cor 2:16; Jd 22f. ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δέ this … that Ro 9:21. ἃ μὲν … ἃ δέ (Lucian, Rhet. Praec. 15) some … others 2 Ti 2:20. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὸ̔ς δὲ … ὸ̔ς δέ Mt 21:35; 25:15 (Lucian, Tim. 57 διδοὺς … ᾧ μὲν πέντε δραχμάς, ᾧ δέ μνᾶν, ᾧ δὲ ἡμιτάλαντον). ὸ̔ μὲν … ὸ̔ δὲ … ὸ̔ δέ Mt 13:8b, 23. ᾧ μὲν … ἄλλῳ δὲ … ἑτέρῳ (ἄλλῳ δέ is then repeated five times, and before the last one there is a second ἑτέρῳ) 1 Cor 12:8–10. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἄλλο κτλ. Mk 4:4. ὸ̔ μὲν … καὶ ἕτερον (repeated several times) Lk 8:5. ἃ μὲν … ἄλλα δέ (repeated several times) Mt 13:4–8a. In anacoluthon οὓς μέν without οὓς δέ 1 Cor 12:28. ὸ̔ς μὲν … ὁ δὲ ἀσθενῶν Ro 14:2.—B-D-F §250. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 100f.—DELG 1 ὅς. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὅς

  • 3 βασιλεία

    βασιλεία, ας, ἡ (Heraclit. Fgm. 52; Hdt.+) a term relating to royal administration
    gener. kingship, royal power, royal rule (1 Km 15:28; 20:31; Sir 10:8; Jdth 1:1; Esth 3:6; 1 Macc 1:16 al. LXX; En 98:2; TestJob 33:9; Just., Tat., Ath.; οὐ βασιλείαν ἀλλὰ τυράνιδα Mel., P. 49, 354; Orig.) λαβεῖν ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν obtain royal power (for oneself) Lk 19:12, 15; without dat. Rv 17:12 (cp. Jos., Ant. 13, 220); δοῦναί τινι τὴν β. vs. 17; ἔχειν β. ἐπί τινων vs. 18; ἐποίησεν ἡμᾶς βασιλείαν he gave us royal jurisdiction 1:6; cp. 5:10; royal rule Lk 1:33; 22:29; 23:42 v.l. (ἐν τῇ β. σου in your royal power); Ac 1:6; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7); 1 Cor 15:24 (παραδιδόναι as Diod S 1, 43, 6); B 4:4 (Da 7:24). Ps 95:10 (Justin, A I, 41, 4, D. 73: ὁ κύριος ἐβασίλευσεν ἀπὸ τ. ξύλου) is the basis for β. Ἰησοῦ ἐπὶ ξύλου the rule of Jesus on the cross B 8:5 (s. Windisch, Hdb. ad loc.).—Hb 11:33; 1 Cl 61:1.
    esp. of God’s rule the royal reign of God (usually rendered ‘kingdom of God’, and oft. understood as royal realm but with dilution of the primary component of reigning activity), a chiefly eschatological concept, beginning to appear in the prophets, elaborated in apocalyptic passages (Mi 4:7f; Ps 102:19; 144:11–13; Wsd 6:4; 10:10; Da 3:54; 4:3; cp. SibOr 3:47f.—Diod S 5, 71, 1 Zeus takes over the βασιλεία from Cronus; Sextus 311 κοινωνεῖ βασιλείας θεοῦ σοφὸς ἀνήρ) and taught by Jesus. The expressions vary; β. τοῦ θεοῦ and τῶν οὐρανῶν have essentially the same mng., since Israelites used οὐρανός (-οί) as well as other circumlocutions for θεός (cp. Mt 19:23f; s. Bousset, Rel.3 314f); the latter term may also emphasize the heavenly origin and nature of the reign.—Dalman, Worte 75–119; JWeiss, D. Predigt Jesu v. Reiche Gottes2 1900, 1–35; ESellin, D. isr.-jüd. Heilandserwartung 1909, D. alt. Prophetismus 1912, 136ff; BDuhm, D. kommende RG 1910; SMowinckel, Psalmenstudien II 1922, 146ff; LDürr, Ursprung u. Ausbau d. isr. Heilandserwartung 1925; Bousset, Rel3 1926, 213ff; AvGall, βασιλεία τ. θεοῦ 1926; JWissing, Het begrip van het Koningrijk Gods, diss., Leiden 1927; HGressmann, Der Messias 1929; MBuber, Königtum Gottes ’32; PVolz, D. Eschatologie der jüd. Gemeinde im ntl. Zeitalter ’34; Ltzm., D. Weltheiland 1909; TManson, The Teaching of Jesus ’55, 116–284; SAalen, NTS 8, ’61/62, 215–40 (‘house’ or ‘community’ of God); GLadd, JBL 81, ’62, 230–38 (‘realm’); FNötscher, Vom A. zum NT ’62, 226–30 (ethical).
    α. β. τῶν οὐρανῶν mostly in Mt: 3:2; 4:17; 5:3, 10, 19f al.; otherw. (Did., Gen. 52, 11; 60, 28) J 3:5 v.l.; AcPl Ha 8, 31.
    β. β. τοῦ θεοῦ (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 3, 40, 21) Mt 6:33; 12:28; 21:31, 43; Mk 1:15; 4:11, 26, 30 al.; Lk 4:43; 6:20; 7:28; 8:1 al.; Ac 1:3; 8:12; 14:22; 19:8; 28:23, 31; J 3:3, 5; Ro 14:17 (defined as δικαιοσύνη, εἰρήνη, χαρά); 1 Cor 4:20 al.; Ox 1 verso, 7f; Dg 9:1; B 21:1; Pol 2:3; β. θεοῦ 1 Cor 6:10, cp. 9; 15:50; Gal 5:21; Pol 5:3; β. τοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ θεοῦ Eph 5:5; τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Cl 50:3.
    γ. β. τοῦ πατρός Mt 13:43; 26:29.
    δ. β. αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου) Mt 13:41; Lk 24:26 v.l.; cp. Col 1:13.
    ε. β. τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Δαυίδ Mk 11:10, since the Davidic kgdm. is to be reestablished under the Son of David, the Messiah (cp. Is 9:5f; Jer 23:5f).
    ζ. ἡ β. τοῦ κυρίου B 4:13; ἡ β. αὐτοῦ (=κυρίου) ἡ ἐπουράνιος 2 Ti 4:18; EpilMosq 5; ἡ οὐράνιος β. MPol 22:3; ἡ ἐν οὐρανῷ β. Dg 10:2.
    η. αἰώνιος β. τοῦ κυρίου (cp. Da 4:3; Just.; CIG II, 2715a, 3 ἐπὶ τῆς τῶν κυρίων Ῥωμαίων αἰωνίου ἀρχῆς, Dssm., B 277f) 2 Pt 1:11; cp. MPol 20:2.—The greatest blessings conceivable are found in the β. Mt 13:44f. The foll. expr. refer to obtaining it = participate in its benefits: ἅψασθαι τῆς β. B 7:11; δέχεσθαι Mk 10:15; διδόναι Lk 12:32; εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν β. Mt 5:20; 7:21; 18:3; 19:23; Mk 10:23ff; Lk 24:26 P75 (first hand); J 3:5; Ac 14:22; Hs 9, 12, 3f (HWindisch, D. Sprüche v. Eingehen in d. Reich Gs: ZNW 27, 1928, 163–92); εἰσήκειν εἰς τὴν β. 2 Cl 11:7; ἔρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν β. 9:6; ἑτοιμάζειν Mt 25:34; εὔθετον εἶναι τῇ β. Lk 9:62; εὑρεθῆναι εἰς τὴν β. Hs 9, 13, 2; ζητεῖν Mt 6:33; Lk 12:31; καταξιοῦσθαι τῆς β. 2 Th 1:5; κατοικεῖν ἐν τῇ β. Hs 9, 29, 2; κληρονομεῖν Mt 25:34; 1 Cor 6:9f; 15:50; IPhld 3:3; cp. κληρονόμος τῆς β. Js 2:5; μαθητεύεσθαι τῇ β. Mt 13:52; μεθιστάναι εἰς τὴν β. Col 1:13; φθάνει ἡ β. ἐπί τινα Lk 11:20. The phrase ὁρᾶν τὴν β. see the kgdm.=‘realize the fulfillment of God’s promises to Israel’ occurs Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 3:3; Hs 9, 15, 3. The mysteries of the kgdm. can be revealed to those for whom they are intended Mt 13:11; Mk 4:11; διαγγέλλειν Lk 9:60; διαμαρτυρεῖσθαι Ac 28:23; κηρύσσειν καὶ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι Lk 8:1; sim. 16:16; cp. κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς β. Mt 4:23; 9:35; 24:14; κηρύσσειν τὴν β. Lk 9:2; Ac 28:31; λαλεῖν περὶ τῆς β. Lk 9:11. Keep fr. entering: κλείειν Mt 23:13; cp. κλεῖδες τῆς β. 16:19 (s. κλεῖς 1); αἴρειν ἀπό τινος 21:43.—Spoken of as present Mt 12:28; Lk 11:20, perh. also 17:20f (see s.v. ἐντός). Viewed as future, but close at hand ἤγγικεν ἡ β. Mt 3:2; 10:7; Mk 1:15; Lk 10:9, 11; perh. Mk 1:15; ἐγγύς ἐστιν Lk 21:31; ἔρχεται Mt 6:10; Mk 11:10; Lk 11:2; 17:20; μέλλει ἀναφαίνεσθαι 19:11; προσδέχεσθαι τὴν β. Mk 15:43; ἐκδέχεσθαι τὴν β. 2 Cl 12:1; μέλλει ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 42:3; ἡ μέλλουσα β. 2 Cl 5:5; ἥξει ἡ β. 12:2. Conceived of as a banquet (Billerb. IV 1154ff): ἀνακλιθῆναι ἐν τῇ β. Mt 8:11; sim. 26:29; Mk 14:25; Lk 13:28f; 22:16, 18, 30; cp. the parables 14:15ff; Mt 22:2ff. Participants in it are called υἱοὶ τῆς β. Mt 8:12 (of mere external connection); 13:38. Prerequisite for participation is μετάνοια Mt 4:17; Mk 1:15; the willingness to become like children Mt 18:3f; 19:14; Mk 10:14f; Lk 18:16f. Only uprightness will inherit the β. Mt 5:20. Degrees and grades 5:19; 18:1, 4. The prosperous have difficulty entering 19:23f; Mk 10:23–25; Lk 18:24f (cp. vs. 29), those who persist in sin have no prospects at all Mt 13:24ff, 36ff, 47ff.—Paul thinks of the β. as someth. that effects changes in pers. resulting in righteousness, peace (w. God) and joy Ro 14:17. It manifests itself in deeds, not in words 1 Cor 4:20. Those committed to sin will not inherit it 6:9f; Gal 5:21; Eph 5:5 (cp. 2 Cl 9:6); the latter passages show that for Paul the kgdm. is essentially future, since Christians await the complete victory of the spirit over the flesh. Cp. also 2 Ti 4:1. Flesh and blood will not inherit it, i.e. bodies under the direction of the spirit of Christ are required for entrance 1 Cor 15:50 (JJeremias, NTS 2, ’56, 151–59). None other than God calls people into it 1 Th 2:12.—HJWesterink, Het Koninkrijk Gods bij Pls ’37.—The most important lit. to 1931 in PFeine, Theol. d. NTs7 ’36, 73. Additional lit.: GGloege, Reich Gs u. Kirche im NT 1929; RFrick, D. Gesch. des R.-Gs-Gedankens in d. alten Kirche 1929; EScott, The Kgdm. of God in the NT ’31; H-DWendland, Reichsidee u. Gottesreich ’34; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34 (Eng. tr., The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf, ’43 and ’51); TW I 562–95; WKümmel, D. Eschatologie der Evangelien ’36, Verheissg. u. Erfüllg. ’45 and ’53; JHéring, Le Royaume de Dieu et sa Venue (Jesus, Paul) ’38 and ’59; JTheissing, D. Lehre Jesu v. d. ew. Seligkeit ’40; FGrant, The Gospel of the Kgdm. ’40; JWellhagen, Anden och Riket ’41 (Lk); WMichaelis, D. Herr verzieht nicht d. Verheissung ’42; RLiechtenhan, D. Kommen des RGs nach dem NT ’44; GKnight, From Moses to Paul, ’49, 173–87; WArndt, CTM 21, ’50, 8–29; JBright, The Kgdm. of God: The Biblical Concept and Its Mng. for the Church ’53; RSchnackenburg, Gottes Herrschaft u. Reich,4 ’65, tr. JMurray,2 ’68; ELadd, Jesus and the Kgdm., ’64; NPerrin, The Kgdm. of God in the Teaching of Jesus, ’66; MWolter, NTS 41, ’95, 541–63 [Lk].—OT background: WSchmidt, Königtum Gottes in Ugarit u. Israel, ’61; KBernhardt, D. Problem der altorientalischen Königs-Ideologie im AT, VetusT Suppl. 8, ’61.—Patristics: GLampe, JTS 49, ’48, 58–73.
    territory ruled by a king, kingdom (Diod S 4, 68, 4; Appian, Mithrid. 105 §496 ἡ βας. ὅλη=the whole kingdom; OGI 383, 25 [I B.C.]; Ps 67:33; 134:11; Bar 2:4; Tob 1:21; 1 Macc 1:6; 3:27; 2 Macc 9:25; 3 Macc 6:24 al. LXX) Mt 12:25f; 24:7; Mk 3:24; 6:23 (Socrat., Ep. 1, 10 τ. βασιλείας μέρος διδόναι); 13:8; Lk 11:17f; 21:10; αἱ β. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου IRo 6:1. In the account of the temptation Mt 4:8; Lk 4:5 (in a manner very different from Jesus, Alexander [Diod S 17, 51, 2] asks his father, Zeus Ammon, for τὴν ἁπάσης τῆς γῆς ἀρχήν and finds a hearing).—EDNT. DELG s.v. βασιλεύς. M-M. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > βασιλεία

  • 4 μυστήριον

    μυστήριον, ου, τό ‘secret, secret rite, secret teaching, mystery’ a relig. t.t. (predom. pl.) applied in the Gr-Rom. world mostly to the mysteries w. their secret teachings, relig. and political in nature, concealed within many strange customs and ceremonies. The principal rites remain unknown because of a reluctance in antiquity to divulge them (Trag.+; Hdt. 2, 51, 2; Diod S 1, 29, 3; 3, 63, 2; Socrat., Ep. 27, 3; Cornutus 28 p. 56, 22; 57, 4; Alciphron 3, 26, 1; OGI 331, 54; 528, 13; 721, 2, SIG s. index; Sb 7567, 9 [III A.D.]; PGM 1, 131; 4, 719ff; 2477 τὰ ἱερὰ μ. ἀνθρώποις εἰς γνῶσιν; 5, 110; 12, 331; 13, 128 τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ θεοῦ. Only the perfected gnostic is τῶν μυστηρίων ἀκροατής Hippol., Ref. 5, 8, 29.—OKern, D. griech. Mysterien d. klass. Zeit 1927; WOtto, D. Sinn der eleusin. Myst. ’40; MNilsson, The Dionysiac Mysteries of the Hell. and Rom. Age, ’57; Kl. Pauly III 1533–42; WBurkert, Antike Mysterien ’90). Also LXX and other versions of the OT use the word, as well as En (of the heavenly secret) and numerous pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph. (C. Ap. 2, 189, 266), apolog. (exc. Ar.); it is a loanw. in rabb. Our lit. uses μ. in ref. to the transcendent activity of God and its impact on God’s people.
    the unmanifested or private counsel of God, (God’s) secret, the secret thoughts, plans, and dispensations of God (SJCh 78, 9; τὸ μ. τῆς μοναρχίας τῆς κατὰ τὸν θεόν Theoph. Ant. 2, 28 [p. 166, 17]) which are hidden fr. human reason, as well as fr. all other comprehension below the divine level, and await either fulfillment or revelation to those for whom they are intended (the divine Logos as διδάσκαλος θείων μυστηρίων Orig., C. Cels. 3, 62, 9: the constellations as δεῖγμα καὶ τύπον … μεγάλου μυστηρίου Hippol. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 7]; Abraham is τῶν θείων … μέτοχος μυστηρίων Did., Gen. 213, 20).
    In the gospels μ. is found only in one context, where Jesus says to the disciples who have asked for an explanation of the parable(s) ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον δέδοται τῆς βασιλείας τ. θεοῦ Mk 4:11; the synopt. parallels have the pl. Mt 13:11 (LCerfaux, NTS 2, ’55/56, 238–49); Lk 8:10.—WWrede, D. Messiasgeh. in den Evv. 1901; HEbeling, D. Messiasgeh. u. d. Botschaft des Mc-Evangelisten ’39; NJohansson, SvTK 16, ’40, 3–38; OPiper, Interpretation 1, ’47, 183–200; RArida, St Vladimar Theol. Qtly 38, ’94, 211–34 (patristic exegesis Mk 4:10–12 par.).
    The Pauline lit. has μ. in 21 places. A secret or mystery, too profound for human ingenuity, is God’s reason for the partial hardening of Israel’s heart Ro 11:25 or the transformation of the surviving Christians at the Parousia 1 Cor 15:51. Even Christ, who was understood by so few, is God’s secret or mystery Col 2:2, hidden ages ago 1:26 (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 16 τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ κεκρυμμένον μυστήριον μέχρι τῆσδε τῆς ἡμέρας), but now gloriously revealed among the gentiles vs. 27, to whom the secret of Christ, i.e. his relevance for them, is proclaimed, 4:3 (CMitton, ET 60, ’48/49, 320f). Cp. Ro 16:25; 1 Cor 2:1 (cp. Just., D. 91, 1; 131, 2 al. μ. τοῦ σταυροῦ; 74, 3 τὸ σωτήριον τοῦτο μ., τοῦτʼ ἔστι τὸ πάθος τοῦ χριστοῦ). The pl. is used to denote Christian preaching by the apostles and teachers in the expr. οἰκονόμοι μυστηρίων θεοῦ 1 Cor 4:1 (Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 23, 104 calls the teachings of Pyth. θεῖα μυστήρια). Not all Christians are capable of understanding all the mysteries. The one who speaks in tongues πνεύματι λαλεῖ μυστήρια utters secret truths in the Spirit which the person alone shares w. God, and which others, even Christians, do not understand 1 Cor 14:2. Therefore the possession of all mysteries is a great joy 13:2 (Just., D. 44, 2). And the spirit-filled apostle can say of the highest stage of Christian knowledge, revealed only to the τέλειοι: λαλοῦμεν θεοῦ σοφίαν ἐν μυστηρίῳ we impart the wisdom of God in the form of a mystery (ἐν μυστηρίῳ=in a mysterious manner [Laud. Therap. 11] or =secretly, so that no unauthorized person would learn of it [cp. Cyr. of Scyth. p. 90, 14 ἐν μυστηρίῳ λέγει]) 2:7 (AKlöpper, ZWT 47, 1905, 525–45).—Eph, for which (as well as for Col) μ. is a predominant concept, sees the μ. τοῦ θελήματος αὐτοῦ (sc. θεοῦ) 1:9 or μ. τ. Χριστοῦ 3:4 or μ. τ. εὐαγγελίου 6:19 in acceptance of the gentiles as Christians 3:3ff, 9ff. A unique great mystery is revealed 5:32, where the relation betw. Christ and the Christian community or church is spoken of on the basis of Gen 2:24 (cp. the interpretation of the sun as symbol of God, Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 8], and s. WKnox, St. Paul and the Church of the Gentiles, ’39, 183f; 227f; WBieder, TZ 11, ’55, 329–43).
    In Rv μ. is used in ref. to the mysterious things portrayed there. The whole content of the book appears as τὸ μ. τοῦ θεοῦ 10:7. Also τὸ μ. τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων 1:20; τὸ μ. τῆς γυναικός 17:7, cp. vs. 5, where in each case μ. may mean allegorical significance (so BEaston, Pastoral Epistles ’47, 215).
    that which transcends normal understanding, transcendent/ultimate reality, secret, with focus on Israelite/Christian experience.
    1 Ti uses μ. as a formula: τὸ μ. τῆς πίστεως is simply faith 3:9. τὸ τ. εὐσεβείας μ. the secret of (our) piety vs. 16.—τὸ μ. τῆς ἀνομίας 2 Th 2:7 s. ἀνομία 1 (Jos., Bell. 1, 470 calls the life of Antipater κακίας μυστήριον because of his baseness practiced in secret. Cp. also SibOr 8, 58 τὰ πλάνης μυστήρια; 56).—PFurfey, CBQ 8, ’46, 179–91.
    in Ign.: the death and resurrection of Jesus as μ. IMg 9:1 (τὸ περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως μ. Orig., C. Cels. 1, 7, 9). The virginity of Mary, her childbearing, and the Lord’s death are called τρία μ. κραυγῆς three mysteries (to be) loudly proclaimed IEph 19:1 (they are mysteries because they go so contrary to human expectation). So also of the annunciation to Mary and her conception GJs 12:2f. The deacons are οἱ διάκονοι μυστηρίων Ἰ. Χρ. ITr 2:3.
    Quite difficult is the saying about the tried and true prophet ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας who acts in accord with the earthly mystery of (God’s) assembly D 11:11. This may refer to celibacy; the prophet lives in such a way as to correspond to the relation betw. Christ and the people of God; cp. Eph 5:32 (so Harnack, TU II 1; 2, 1884, 44ff; HWeinel, Die Wirkungen d. Geistes u. der Geister 1899, 131–38; PDrews, Hdb. z. d. ntl. Apokryphen 1904, 274ff; RKnopf, Hdb. ad loc.—Differently CTaylor, The Teaching of the Twelve Apost. 1886, 82–92; RHarris, The Teaching of the Ap. 1887; FFunk, Patr. Apostol.2 1901 ad loc.; Zahn, Forschungen III 1884, 301).
    μ. occurs oft. in Dg: τὸ τῆς θεοσεβείας μ. the secret of (our) piety 4:6 (what Dg means by μ. is detailed in ch. 5). Likew. of Christian teaching (cp. Ps.-Phocyl. 229 and comments by Horst 260–61) πατρὸς μυστήρια 11:2; cp. vs. 5. Hence the Christian can μυστήρια θεοῦ λαλεῖν 10:7. In contrast to ἀνθρώπινα μ. 7:1. οὗ (sc. τ. θεοῦ) τὰ μυστήρια whose secret counsels 7:2 (the divine will for orderly management of the universe). Of God keeping personal counsel κατεῖχεν ἐν μυστηρίῳ … τὴν σοφὴν αὐτοῦ βουλήν 8:10.—Lghtf., St. Paul’s Ep. to the Col. and Phlm. p. 167ff; JRobinson, St. Paul’s Ep. to the Eph. 1904, 234ff; GWobbermin, Religionsgesch. Studien 1896, 144ff; EHatch, Essays on Bibl. Gk. 1889, 57ff; HvSoden, ZNW 12, 1911, 188ff; TFoster, AJT 19, 1915, 402–15; OCasel, D. Liturgie als Mysterienfeier5 1923; JSchneider, ‘Mysterion’ im NT: StKr 104, ’32, 255–78; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi ’37; KPrümm, ‘Mysterion’ v. Pls bis Orig.: ZKT 61, ’37, 391–425, Biblica 37, ’56, 135–61; RBrown, The Semitic Background of ‘Mystery’ in the NT, ’68; cp. KKuhn, NTS 7, 61, 366 for Qumran parallels to various passages in Eph and Ro; ABöhlig, Mysterion u. Wahrheit, ’68, 3–40; JFruytier, Het woord M. in de catechesen van Cyrillus van Jerusalem, ’50; ANock, Hellenistic Mysteries and Christian Sacraments, Essays on Religion and the Ancient World II, ’72, 790–820; AHarvey, The Use of Mystery Language in the Bible: JTS 31, ’80, 320–36.—DELG s.v. μύω. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μυστήριον

  • 5 φιλέω

    φῐλέω, [dialect] Aeol. [full] φίλημμι Sapph.79, cf. Ead. Oxy. 1787 Fr.1 + 2.24; [ per.] 2sg. φίλησθα Ead.22; late [ per.] 3pl.
    A

    φίλεισι Epigr.Gr.990.12

    (Balbill.): [dialect] Boeot. [full] φίλειμι Hdn.Gr.2.930: [dialect] Ep. inf.

    φιλήμεναι Il.22.265

    : [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. [tense] impf.

    φιλέεσκε 3.388

    , al.: [tense] fut. φιλήσω, [dialect] Ep. inf.

    φιλησέμεν Od.4.171

    : [tense] aor. 1

    ἐφίλησα Pi.P.2.16

    , etc.: [tense] pf. πεφίληκα ib. 1.13:—[voice] Med., Poet. 1 [tense] aor. ἐφῑλάμην; [ per.] 3sg. ἐφίλατο, φίλατο, Il.5.61, 20.304, Call.Aet.Oxy. 2080.55; [ per.] 3pl.

    φίλαντο Lyc.274

    ; imper.

    φῖλαι Il.5.117

    , 10.280; subj.

    φίλωνται h.Cer. 117

    , Hes.Th.97; but φίλατο as [voice] Pass., A.R.3.66; also part.

    φιλάμενος IG14.1549

    ([place name] Rome):—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. [voice] Med. φιλήσομαι in pass. sense, Od.1.123, 15.281, Antipho 1.19: [tense] fut. 3

    πεφιλήσομαι Call. Del. 270

    : [tense] aor.

    ἐφιλήθην E.Hec. 1000

    , Pl.Phdr. 253c: [dialect] Ep. [ per.] 3pl.

    ἐφίληθεν Il.2.668

    : [tense] pf.

    πεφίλημαι Pi.N.4.45

    , X.An.1.9.28; [dialect] Dor. part.

    πεφιλᾱμένος Theoc. 3.3

    . [[pron. full] exceptin the forms ἐφίλατο, φῑλατο, etc.]: ([etym.] φίλος):— love, regard with affection, opp. μισεῖν, Pl.R. 334c, Arist.Rh. 1380b34;

    φιλήσω τὸν δῆμον τὸν Ἀθηναίων IG12.15.36

    ; (on its relation to sexual love v. infr. 3); of the love of gods for men,

    φ. δέ ἑ μητίετα Ζεύς Il. 2.197

    ; πέρι γάρ μ' ἐφίλει (of the love of the master for his swineherd) Od.14.146; (also

    ὃν περὶ κῆρι φ. Ζεὺς.. παντοίην φιλότητα Od.15.245

    , cf. Il.9.117);

    μάλα τούς γε φ. ἑκάεργος Ἀπόλλων Il.16.94

    ;

    εἰ.. Ἕκτορά περ φιλέεις καὶ κήδεαι αὐτοῦ 7.204

    , etc.; of love for a child reared, Od. 15.370;

    αἰ δὲ μὴ φίλει, ταχέως φιλήσει κωὐκὶ θέλοισα Sapph.1.23

    ;

    λόγοις φιλοῦσαν οὐ στέργω φίλην S.Ant. 543

    ;

    φιλέων φιλέοντα Pi.P.10.66

    ;

    ὃν δ' ἐχρῆν φιλεῖν στυγεῖς A.Ch. 907

    ;

    μάλιστά σ'.. ἤχθηρα κἀφίλησ' ἐν ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ S.El. 1363

    ;

    ὃν οἱ θεοὶ φιλοῦσιν ἀποθνῄσκει νέος Men.125

    ; ὅσα θεοὶ ἀνθρώποις οὓς φιλοῦσιν [διδόασιν] SIG 985.48 (Philadelphia, i B. C.); οἱ φιλοῦντές τινα his friends, freq. in messages and letters, OGI184.10 (Philae, i B. C.), Ep.Tit.3.15, PSI8.971.30 (iii/iv A. D.), etc.; φιλεῖν ἐμαυτήν, αὑτόν, E.Hel. 999, Med.86, etc.:—[voice] Pass., to be beloved by one,

    ἐκ Διός Il.2.668

    ;

    παρ' αὐτῇ 13.627

    , etc.; τινι E.Hec. 1000.
    2 treat affectionately or kindly, esp. welcome, entertain a guest, Od.4.29, 5.135, Il.3.207, etc.;

    φίλος δ' ἦν ἀνθρώποισιν, πάντας γὰρ φιλέεσκεν ὁδῷ ἔπι οἰκία ναίων Il.6.15

    ;

    ξεῖνον ἐνὶ μεγάροισι φ. Od.8.42

    ;

    ξεῖνον ἄγων ἐν δώμασι.. φιλέειν καὶ τιέμεν 15.543

    , cf. 14.322; θεὸς (i. e. Calypso)

    ἥ με.. ἐφίλει τε καὶ ἔτρεφεν 7.256

    ; τίς ἂν φιλέοντι μάχοιτο; who would quarrel with a kind host? 8.208; etc.:—[voice] Pass., παρ' ἄμμι φιλήσεαι welcome shalt thou be in our house, Od.1.123, cf. 15.281.
    3 opp. ἐρᾶν, τούτους μάλιστά φασι φιλεῖν ὧν ἂν ἐρῶσι regard with affection those for whom they have a passion, Pl.Phdr. 231c;

    ὥστε οὐ μόνον φιλοῖο ἄν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐρῷο ὑπ' ἀνθρώπων X.Hier.11.11

    , cf. Smp.8.21; εἰκὸς τὸ φιλεῖν τοὺς ἐρωμένους Arist.APr. 70a6; but φ. is used of lovers,

    ἥ γ' Εὐρυμάχῳ μισγέσκετο καὶ φιλέεσκεν Od.18.325

    ;

    Λυσίθεος Μικίωνα φιλῖν φησι μάλισστα τῶν ἐν τῇ πόλει IG12.924

    ;

    οὐκ ἔστ' ἐραστὴς ὅστις οὐκ ἀεὶ φιλεῖ E.Tr. 1051

    , cf. Hdt.4.176 ([voice] Pass.), Ar.Lys. 905; of the love of man for wife, ὅς τις ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς.. τὴν αὐτοῦ φιλέει ( cherishes her)

    καὶ κήδεται ὡς καὶ ἐγὼ τὴν ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον Il.9.343

    , cf. 486; τὴν αὐτὸς φιλέεσκεν loved and cherished as his wife, ib. 450; but ἐμὲ.. ἀτιμάζει, φιλέει δ' ἀΐδηλον Ἄρηα (Hephaestus speaks of Aphrodite) Od.8.309: Com.,

    ὦ Δῆμ', ἐραστής εἰμι σὸς φιλῶ τέ σε καὶ κήδομαί σου Ar.Eq. 1341

    .
    b of sexual intercourse, Hsch. s.v. βαίνειν.
    4 show outward signs of love, esp. kiss (not in Hom.), φ. τοῖσι στόμασι kiss on the mouth, opp. τὰς παρειὰς φιλέονται, Hdt. 1.134, cf. X.Cyr.1.4.27, Smp.9.5;

    κατὰ τὸ στόμα AP5.284

    (Agath.);

    φιλήσω.. τὸ σὸν κάρα S.OC 1131

    ;

    πατέρα.. περὶ χεῖρε βαλοῦσα φιλήσει A.Ag. 1559

    (anap.), cf. Ar.Av. 671, 674, Pl.Phdr. 255e, Ev.Marc.14.44, etc.: c. dupl. acc., τὸ φίλαμα, τὸ.. τὸν Ἄδωνιν.. ἀποθνάσκοντα φίλασεν the kiss wherewith she kissed him, Mosch.3.69:—[voice] Med., τὰς παρειάς kiss each other's cheeks, Hdt.l.c.
    5 of things as objects of love, like, approve,

    σχέτλια ἔργα Od.14.83

    ;

    ἀοιδάν Pi.N.3.7

    ;

    οὔθ' ἱστῶν ἐφίλησεν ὁδοὺς οὔτε δείπνων.. τέρψιας P.9.18

    , etc.;

    αἰσχροκέρδειαν S.Ant. 1056

    , cf. 312; τὰς λευκοτάτας [μάζας] Telecl. 1.6 (anap.);

    Πράμνιον οἶνον Ephipp.28

    .
    6 of things as the subject,

    ἡσυχία δὲ φιλεῖ συμπόσιον Pi.N.9.48

    ;

    ἢ [μίτρη] μαστοὺς ἐφίλησε Call.Epigr.39

    .
    7 in making a request,

    οἶσθ' ὁτιὴ φιλῶ σ' ἐγώ, κἀμοὶ πιθόμενος ὑπαποκίνει τῆς ὁδοῦ Ar.Av. 1010

    ; so τί πράσσει Φηλικίων ὁ ἀγαθός; φιλῶ σε pray, how goes it with the worthy Felicio? Arr.Epict.1.19.20; so perh. in Herod.1.66, πείσθητί μευ, φιλέω σε (but rather 'I speak as a true friend').
    II after Hom., c. inf., love to do, be fond of doing, and so to be wont or used to do,

    φιλέει ὁ θεὸς τὰ ὑπερέχοντα κολούειν Hdt.7.10

    .

    έ; ἢν ἁμάρτωσι τοῦ πατρικοῦ τύπου.. φιλέουσι διαφθείρεσθαι Democr.228

    ;

    Μοῖσα μεμνᾶσθαι φ. Pi. N.1.12

    , cf. P.3.18;

    φιλεῖ δὲ τίκτειν ὕβρις.. ὕβριν A.Ag. 763

    (lyr.);

    τοῖς θανοῦσί τοι φιλοῦσι πάντες κειμένοις ἐπεγγελᾶν S.Aj. 989

    , etc.; rarely with part. for inf.,

    φιλεῖς δὲ δρῶσ' αὐτὸ σφόδρα Ar.Pl. 645

    .
    2 of things, events, etc.,

    αὔρη ἀπὸ ψυχροῦ τινος φιλέει πνέειν Hdt.2.27

    ;

    φιλεῖ ὠδῖνα τίκτειν νύξ A.Supp. 769

    ;

    ἐμπόρων ἔπη φ. πλανᾶσθαι S.OC 304

    ;

    φιλεῖ γάρ πως τὰ τοιαῦθ' ἑτέρᾳ τρέπεσθαι Ar.Nu. 813

    (lyr.);

    φιλεῖ μεγάλα στρατόπεδα ἐκπλήγνυσθαι Th.4.125

    ;

    ὃ δὴ φ. ὁ ἔρως ἐμποιεῖν Pl.Smp. 182c

    : esp. with γίγνεσθαι of what usually happens, ἀπὸ πείρης πάντα ἀνθρώποισι φιλέει γίνεσθαι everything comes to man by experience, Hdt.7.9.γ, cf. 7.10.ζ, 7.50, Th.3.42, Isoc.6.104, Pl. R. 494c, al.;

    οἷα φ. γίγνεσθαι Th.7.79

    , cf. Hdt.8.128; without γίγνεσθαι, οἷα δὴ φιλεῖ as is wont, Pl.R. 467b;

    ὁποῖα φ. Luc.Am.9

    .
    3 impers., φιλέει δέ κως προσημαίνειν (sc. ὁ θεός) , εὖτ' ἂν .. Hdt.6.27; ὡς δὴ φιλεῖ.. λόγον ἔχειν ἀνθρώπους as it is usual for.., Plu.Pomp. 73.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > φιλέω

  • 6 ἐπί

    ἐπί prep. w. gen., dat., or acc.; s. the lit. on ἀνά, beg. (Hom.+). The basic idea is ‘upon’ (opp. ὑπό) Kühner-G. I 495; s. also Rob 600–605. (In the foll. classifications case use is presented seriatim; in earlier editions of this lexicon all sections, except 13, 17, and 18 [of time], were included under the general rubric ‘Place’.)
    marker of location or surface, answering the question ‘where?’ on, upon, near
    w. gen., marking a position on a surface ἐ. (τῆς) γῆς on (the) earth (cp. En 9:1; 98:1; ἐ. γῆς 25:6; PsSol 17:2) Mt 6:10, 19; 9:6; 23:9; Mk 6:47 al. (Ar. 12, 1; Just., A I, 54, 7 al.). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης on the sea (cp. Job 9:8; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 129 βαδίζειν ἐ. τῆς θαλ.; Lucian, Philops. 13 βαδίζειν ἐφʼ ὕδατος, VH 2, 4; Artem. 3, 16 ἐ. τ. θαλάσσης περιπατεῖν; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 15 p. 5, 26ff relying on the testimony of Hesiod: Orion was given a gift [δωρεά] by the gods καὶ ἐ. κυμάτων πορεύεσθαι καὶ ἐ. τῆς γῆς) Mt 14:26; Mk 6:48f; J 6:19 (w. acc. P75; s. 4bβ below). ἐ. τῶν νεφελῶν on the clouds Mt 24:30; 26:64 (Da 7:13; cp. Philo, Praem. 8). ἐ. κλίνης 9:2; Lk 17:34. ἐ. τοῦ δώματος on the roof vs. 31; Mt 24:17; 10:27 foll. by pl. W. verbs: κάθημαι ἐ. τινος sit on someth. (Job 2:8; ἐ. τοῦ ἅρματος GrBar 6:2; cp. JosAs 27:1 ἐ. τοῦ ὀχήματος καθεζόμενος; Just., D. 90, 5 ἐ. λίθου καθεζόμενος) Mt 24:3; 27:19; Ac 8:28; Rv 6:16; 9:17 (the same prep. used in Rv w. κάθημαι and dat. s. bα below, and w. acc. cα). ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τινος stand on someth. Ac 21:40; Rv 10:5, 8 (Just., D. 86, 2 ἐστηρίχθαι). With parts of the body: ἐ. χειρῶν αἴρειν carry on (i.e. in/with) their hands Mt 4:6; Lk 4:11 (both Ps 90:12). ἐ. κεφαλῆς on the head (Hdt. 5, 12, 4) J 20:7; 1 Cor 11:10; Rv 12:1. ἐ. τοῦ μετώπου Rv 7:3; 9:4. ἐ. γυμνοῦ on the naked body Mk 14:51. Cp. use of ἐπί w. καθίζω and gen., and ἐπί w. κάθημαι and acc. Mt 19:28.—In a gener. and fig. sense Ac 21:23.
    w. dat., gener. suggesting contiguity on, in, above.
    α. answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., D. 105, 5 ἐ. τῷ σταυρῷ; Tat., 9:1 ἐ. τοῖς ὄρεσι; Ath. 20, 1 ἐ. τῷ μετώπῳ; Mel., P. 19, 131 ἐ. σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ) ἐ. πίνακι on a platter Mt 14:8, 11; Mk 6:25, 28. ἀνακλῖναι ἐ. τῷ χλωρῷ χόρτῳ on the green grass 6:39. ἐ. τοῖς κραβάττοις vs. 55. ἐπέκειτο ἐπʼ αὐτῷ lay on it (or before it) J 11:38. καθήμενος ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 4:9 (cp. gen. w. καθ. 1a above, and acc. cα below) 5:13; 7:10 and oft. ἐφʼ ἵπποις λευκοῖς on white horses 19:14. ἐ. σανίσιν on planks Ac 27:44. ἐ. τῇ στοᾷ in the colonnade 3:11. τὰ ἐ. τοῖς οὐρανοῖς what is above (or in) the heavens Eph 1:10. ἐπʼ αὐτῷ above him, at his head Lk 23:38 (=Mt 27:37 ἐπάνω τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ).
    β. answering the question ‘whither?’ on, upon (Hom. et al.) w. verbs that indicate a direction: οἰκοδομεῖν ἐ. τινι build upon someth. Mt 16:18. ἐποικοδομεῖν Eph 2:20. ἐπιβάλλειν ἐπίβλημα ἐ. ἱματίῳ παλαιῷ put a patch on an old garment Mt 9:16. ἐπιπίπτειν ἐ. τινι Ac 8:16. ἐκάθισεν ἐ. τῷ θρόνῳ he sat down on the throne GJs 11:1. λίθον ἐπʼ αὐτῇ βαλέτω J 8:7 v.l. (cp. 12a below).
    w. acc., answering the question ‘where?’ (Hom. et al.; LXX; JosAs 29:2 φορῶν ἐ. τὸν μηρὸν αὐτοῦ ῥομφαίαν; Just., D. 53, 1 ζυγὸν ἐ. αὐχένα μὴ ἔχων)
    α. on, over someth. καθεύδειν ἐ. τι sleep on someth. Mk 4:38. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τι sit on someth. Mt 19:28 (in the same vs. καθίζω w. gen., s. a above) J 12:15; Rv 4:4; 6:2; 11:16 al.; cp. Lk 21:35b; κεῖσθαι ἐ. τι lie upon someth. 2 Cor 3:15. κατακεῖσθαι Lk 5:25. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὸν αἰγιαλόν stand on the shore Mt 13:2; cp. Rv 14:1. ἑστῶτας ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν standing beside the sea 15:2. ἔστη ἐ. τὴν κεφαλὴν τοῦ παιδίου (the star) remained stationary over the head of the child GJs 21:3. σκηνοῦν ἐ. τινα spread a tent over someone Rv 7:15. ἐ. τὴν δεξιάν at the right hand 5:1. λίθος ἐ. λίθον stone upon stone Mt 24:2.
    β. ἐ. τὸ αὐτό at the same place, together (Ps.-X., Respublica Athen. [The Old Oligarch] 2, 2; Pla., Rep. 329a; SIG 736, 66 [92 B.C.]. In pap=‘in all’: PTebt 14, 20 [114 B.C.]; PFay 102, 6.—2 Km 2:13; En 100:2) εἶναι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό be together Lk 17:35; Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44. In 1 Cor 7:5 it is a euphemistic expr. for sexual union. κατοικεῖν ἐ. τὸ αὐτό live in the same place (Dt 25:5) Hm 5, 1, 4. Also w. verbs of motion (Sus 14 Theod.) συνέρχεσθαι ἐ. τὸ αὐτό come together to the same place 1 Cor 11:20; 14:23; cp. B 4:10 (Just., A I, 67, 3 συνέλευσις γίνεται). συνάγεσθαι (Phlegon of Tralles [Hadr.]: 257 Fgm. 36 III 9 Jac.; PsSol 2:2; TestJob 28:5 Jos., Bell. 2, 346) Mt 22:34; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 1 Cl 34:7. ἐ. τὸ αὐτὸ μίγνυσθαι be mixed together Hm 10, 3, 3. προσετίθει ἐ. τὸ αὐτό added to their number Ac 2:47.
    γ. at, by, near someone or someth. καθῆσθαι ἐ. τὸ τελώνιον sit at the tax-office Mt 9:9 (ἐ. τὰς ὡραίας πύλας GrBar prol. 2); Mk 2:14. ἑστηκέναι ἐ. τὴν θύραν stand at the door Rv 3:20. σὺ ἔστης ἐ. τὸ θυσιαστήριον you are standing (ἕστηκας deStrycker) as priest at the altar GJs 8:2. ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς among you 2 Th 1:10; cp. Ac 1:21.—Of pers., over whom someth. is done ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ ἐ. τινα speak the name of Jesus over someone Ac 19:13. ἐπικαλεῖν τὸ ὄνομά τινος ἐ. τινα=to claim someone for one’s own (Jer 14:9; 2 Ch 7:14; 2 Macc 8:15) Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12); Js 2:7; Hs 8, 6, 4. προσεύχεσθαι ἐ. τινα pray over someone Js 5:14.
    marker of presence or occurrence near an object or area, at, near
    w. gen., of immediate proximity to things at, near (Hdt. 7, 115; X., An. 4, 3, 28 al.; LXX, Just.) ἐ. τ. θυρῶν at the gates (Plut., C. Gracch. 841 [14, 3]; PRyl 127, 8f [29 A.D.] κοιμωμένου μου ἐ. τῆς θύρας; 1 Macc 1:55; Just., D. 111, 4) Ac 5:23 (s. b below for dat. in 5:9). ἐ. τῆς θαλάσσης near the sea (Polyb. 1, 44, 4; Ex 14:2; Dt 1:40; 1 Macc 14:34) J 21:1. ἐ. τῆς ὁδοῦ by the road Mt 21:19. ἐσθίειν ἐ. τῆς πραπέζης τινός eat at someone’s table Lk 22:30 (cp. POxy 99, 14 [55 A.D.] τράπεζα, ἐφʼ ἧς Σαραπίων καὶ μέτοχοι; Da 11:27 LXX ἐ. μιᾶς τραπέζης). ἐ. τοῦ (τῆς) βάτου at the thornbush = in the passage about the thornbush (i.e. Ex 3:1ff) Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37.
    with dat., of immediate proximity at, near by (Hom.+) ἦν ἔτι ἐ. τῷ τόπῳ ὅπου was still at the place, where J 11:30 v.l. (for ἐν; cp. Just., D. 402). ἐ. τῇ θύρᾳ (ἐ. θύραις) at the door (Hom. et al.; Wsd 19:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 90; Just., D. 32, 3) Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29; Ac 5:9 (s. a above). ἐ. τοῖς πυλῶσιν Rv 21:12. ἐ. τῇ πηγῇ J 4:6 (Jos., Ant. 5, 58 ἐ. τινι πηγῇ; Just., A I, 64, 1 ἐ. ταῖς … πηγαῖς). ἐ. τῇ προβατικῇ (sc. πύλῃ) near the sheepgate 5:2; cp. Ac 3:10. ἐ. τῷ ποταμῷ near the river (since Il. 7, 133; Jos., Ant. 4, 176 ἐ. τ. Ἰορδάνῳ) Rv 9:14.—Of pers. (Diod S 14, 113, 6; Just., A I, 40, 7) ἐφʼ ὑμῖν among you 2 Cor 7:7; cp. Ac 28:14 v.l.
    marker of involvement in an official proceeding, before, w. gen., of pers., esp. in the language of lawsuits (Pla., Leg. 12, 943d; Isaeus 5, 1 al.; UPZ 71, 15; 16 [152 B.C.]; POxy 38, 11; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 382, 23=BGU 909, 23; Jos., Vi. 258; Just., A II, 1, 1 ἐ. Οὐρβίκου). ἐ. τοῦ ἡγεμόνος in the governor’s presence Mt 28:14. ἐ. ἡγεμόνων καὶ βασιλέων Mk 13:9. ἐ. σου before you (the procurator) Ac 23:30. ἐ. Τερτούλλου Phlm subscr. v.l.; στάντος μου ἐ. τοῦ συνεδρίου Ac 24:20 (cp. Diod S 11, 55, 4 ἐ. τοῦ κοινοῦ συνεδρίου τ. Ἑλλήνων). γυναικὸς … διαβληθείσης ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου Papias (2:17). κρίνεσθαι ἐ. τῶν ἀδίκων go to law before the unrighteous 1 Cor 6:1. κριθήσεται ἐφʼ ὑμῶν before your tribunal D 11:11. μαρτυρεῖν ἐ. Ποντίου Πιλάτου testify before Pontius Pilate 1 Ti 6:13 (s. μαρτυρέω 1c). ἐ. τοῦ βήματος (POxy 37 I, 3 [49 A.D.]) ἑστὼς ἐ. τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρός εἰμι I am standing before Caesar’s tribunal Ac 25:10 (Appian says Prooem. c. 15 §62 of himself: δίκαις ἐν Ῥώμῃ συναγορεύσας ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων=I acted as attorney in lawsuits in Rome before the emperors).—Gener. in someone’s presence (Appian, Syr. 61 §324 ἐφʼ ὑμῶν=in your presence) ἐ. Τίτου before Titus 2 Cor 7:14. Cp.10 below.
    marker of movement to or contact w. a goal, toward, in direction of, on
    w. gen., marking contact with the goal that is reached, answering the question ‘whither?’ toward, on, at w. verbs of motion (Appian, Iber. 98 §427 ἀπέπλευσεν ἐπʼ οἴκου=he sailed [toward] home; PGM 4, 2468f ἀναβὰς ἐ. δώματος; JosAs 27:1 ἀνέδραμε … ἐ. πέτρας; Jos., Ant. 4, 91 ἔφευγον ἐ. τ. πόλεων; Tat. 33:3 Εὐρώπην ἐ. τοῦ ταύρου καθιδρύσαντος) βάλλειν τὸν σπόρον ἐ. τῆς γῆς Mk 4:26; also σπείρειν vs. 31. πίπτειν (Wsd 18:23; TestAbr A 3 p. 80, 11 [Stone p. 8]; JosAs 9:1) 9:20; 14:35. καθιέναι Ac 10:11. τιθέναι (Sir 17:4) Lk 8:16; J 19:19; Ac 5:15. ἔρχεσθαι Hb 6:7; Rv 3:10; γίνεσθαι ἐ. reach, be at J 6:21. γενόμενος ἐ. τοῦ τόπου when he reached the place Lk 22:40. καθίζειν take one’s seat ἐ. θρόνου (JosAs 7:1 al.) Mt 19:28 (s. 1a end); 23:2; 25:31; J 19:13 (ἐ. βήματος of Pilate as Jos., Bell. 2, 172; of Jesus Just., A I, 35, 6). κρεμαννύναι ἐ. ξύλου hang on a tree (i.e. cross) (Gen 40:19; cp. Just., D. 86, 6 σταυρωθῆναι ἐ. τοῦ ξύλου) Ac 5:30; 10:39; cp. Gal 3:13 (Dt 21:23).
    w. acc.
    α. specifying direction (En 24:2 ἐ. νότον ‘southward’ of position of the mountain) of motion that takes a particular direction, to, toward ἐκτείνας τ. χεῖρα ἐ. τοὺς μαθητάς Mt 12:49; cp. Lk 22:53 (JosAs 12:8). πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὸ ἀπολωλός go after the one that is lost 15:4. ἐ. τὴν ῏Ασσον in the direction of Assos Ac 20:13. ἐπιστρέφειν ἐ. τι turn to someth. 2 Pt 2:22 (cp. Pr 26:11; En 99:5). ὡς ἐ. λῃστήν as if against a robber Mt 26:55; Mk 14:48; Lk 22:52.
    β. from one point to another across, over w. motion implied (Hom.+; LXX) περιπατεῖν, ἐλθεῖν ἐ. τ. θάλασσαν or ἐ. τ. ὕδατα Mt 14:25, 28f; J 6:19 P75. Of spreading across the land (PsSol 17:10): famine Ac 7:11; 11:28; darkness Mt 27:45; Lk 23:44. ἐ. σταδίους δώδεκα χιλιάδων across twelve thousand stades Rv 21:16 v.l. (Polyaenus 5, 44, 4 ἐ. στάδια δέκα); ἐ. πλεῖον further (1 Esdr 2:24; 2 Macc 10:27) Ac 4:17.
    γ. of goal attained (Hom. et al.; LXX) on, upon someone or someth. πέσατε ἐφʼ ἡμᾶς Lk 23:30 (Hos 10:8). ἔπεσεν ἐ. τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Lk 13:4. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τινα come upon someone Mt 3:16; also καταβαίνειν fr. above J 1:33; cp. Rv 16:21. ἀναβαίνειν (Jos., Ant. 13, 138; Just., A II, 12, 7) Lk 5:19. ἐπιβαίνειν Mt 21:5 (Zech 9:9).—Ac 2:3; 9:4 al.; διασωθῆναι ἐ. τ. γῆν be brought safely to the land 27:44; cp. vs. 43; Lk 8:27. ἐ. τὸ πλοῖον to the ship Ac 20:13. ἀναπεσεῖν ἐ. τὴν γῆν lie down or sit down on the ground Mt 15:35. ἔρριψεν αὐτὸν χαμαὶ ἐ. τὸν σάκκον he threw himself down on the sackcloth GJs 13:1. τιθέναι τι ἐ. τι put someth. on someth. (JosAs 16:11) Mt 5:15; Lk 11:33; Mk 8:25 v.l.; likew. ἐπιτιθέναι (JosAs 29:5) Mt 23:4; Mk 8:25; Lk 15:5; J 9:6, 15; Ac 15:10. ἐπιβάλλειν τ. χεῖρας ἐ. τινα (Gen 22:12 al.) Mt 26:50; Lk 21:12; Ac 5:18. Mainly after verbs of placing, laying, putting, bringing, etc. on, to: ἀναβιβάζω, ἀναφέρω, βάλλω, γράφω, δίδωμι, ἐγγίζω, ἐπιβιβάζω, ἐπιγράφω, ἐποικοδομέω, ἐπιρ(ρ)ίπτω, θεμελιόω, ἵστημι, κατάγω, οἰκοδομέω, σωρεύω; s. these entries. Sim. βρέχειν ἐ. τινα cause rain to fall upon someone Mt 5:45 (cp. PsSol 17:18); also τ. ἥλιον ἀνατέλλειν ἐ. τινα cause the sun to rise so that its rays fall upon someone *ibid. τύπτειν τινὰ ἐ. τὴν σιαγόνα strike on the cheek Lk 6:29. πίπτειν ἐ. (τὸ) πρόσωπον (Jdth 14:6) on the face Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16; 1 Cor 14:25; Rv 7:11.To, upon w. acc. of thing πορεύεσθαι ἐ. τὴν ὁδόν go to the road Ac 8:26; cp. 9:11. ἐ. τὰς διεξόδους Mt 22:9. ἵνα μὴ πνέῃ ἄνεμος ἐ. πᾶν δένδρον so that no wind should blow upon any tree Rv 7:1.
    δ. of closeness to someth. or someone to, up to, in the neighborhood of, on ἐ. τὸ μνημεῖον up to the tomb Mk 16:2; Lk 24:1 v.l., 22, 24; cp. ἐ. τὸ μνῆμα Mk 16:2 v.l.; Lk 24:1. ἔρχεσθαι ἐ. τι ὕδωρ come to some water Ac 8:36. ἐ. τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν to the iron gate 12:10. καταβαίνειν ἐ. τὴν θάλασσαν go down to the sea J 6:16. ἐ. τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mt 3:13 (Just., D. 88, 3 al.). ἀναπίπτειν ἐ. τὸ στῆθος he leaned back on (Jesus’) breast J 13:25; 21:20. πίπτειν ἐ. τοὺς πόδας fall at (someone’s) feet Ac 10:25 (JosAs 14:10 ἔπεσεν ἐ πρόσωπον ἐ. τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ). ἐ. τ. ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mt 13:7.—W. acc. of pers. to someone ἐ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἐλθόντες they came to Jesus J 19:33; cp. Mt 27:27; Mk 5:21.
    ε. in imagery of goal or objective to, toward (Just., A II, 7, 6 ἐπʼ ἀμφότερα τρέπεσθαι) ἐπιστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι ἐ. τινα turn to (Dt 30:10; 31:20 al.; Ar. 2, 1 ἔλθωμεν καὶ ἐ. τὸ ἀνθρώπινον γένος ‘let us now turn to …’; Just., D. 56, 11 ἐ. τὰς γραφὰς ἐπανελθών) Lk 1:17; Ac 9:35; 11:21; 14:15; 26:20; Gal 4:9; 1 Pt 2:25.
    marker of manner, corresponding to an adv., w. dat. (Aeschyl., Suppl. 628 ἐπʼ ἀληθείᾳ; UPZ 162 VI, 3 [117 B.C.] κακοτρόπως καὶ ἐ. ῥαδιουργίᾳ; POxy 237 VI, 21 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; ἐφʼ ὁράσει En 14:8; Just., A I, 9, 3 ἐφʼ ὕβρει; 55, 7 ἐ. τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι ‘in this form’; Tat. 17, 1 ἐπʼ ἀκριβείᾳ; Ath. 33, 2 ἐφʼ ἑνὶ γάμῳ) ὁ σπείρων ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις (in contrast to ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως one who sows sparingly) one who sows in blessing (i.e. generously) 2 Cor 9:6. ἐπʼ εὐλογίαις θερίζειν reap generously ibid.
    marker of basis for a state of being, action, or result, on, w. dat. (Hom. et al.)
    ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ ζῆν live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3. cp. Ps.-Pla., Alcib. 1, 105c; Plut., Mor. 526d; Alciphron 3, 7, 5; SibOr 4, 154). ἐ. τῷ ῥήματί σου depending on your word Lk 5:5. οὐ συνῆκαν ἐ. τοῖς ἄρτοις they did not arrive at an understanding (of it) (by reflecting) on (the miracle of) the loaves Mk 6:52 (cp. Demosth. 18, 121 τί σαυτὸν οὐκ ἐλλεβορίζεις ἐ. τούτοις [sc. λόγοις];=why do you not come to an understanding concerning these words?). ἐ. τῇ πίστει on the basis of faith Ac 3:16; Phil 3:9. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι on the basis of hope, supporting itself on hope Ac 2:26 (? s. ἐλπίς 1bα); Ro 4:18; 8:20; 1 Cor 9:10; Tit 1:2.—Ac 26:6 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι gives the basis of the trial at law, as does ἐ. εὐεργεσίᾳ 4:9. ἀπολύειν τ. γυναῖκα ἐ. πορνείᾳ Mt 19:9 (cp. Dio Chrys. 26 [43], 10 ἀπολύειν ἐπʼ ἀργυρίῳ; Ath. 2, 3 κρίνεσθαι … μὴ ἐ. τῷ ὀνόματι, ἐ. δὲ τῷ ἀδικήματι). γυναικὸς ἐ. πόλλαις ἁμαρτίαις διαβληθείσης Papias (2:17). On the basis of the testimony of two witnesses (cp. Appian, Iber. 79 §343 ἤλεγχον ἐ. μάρτυσι) Hb 10:28 (Dt 17:6); sim. use of ἐ. τινί on the basis of someth.: 8:6; 9:10, 15 (here it may also be taken in the temporal sense; s. 18 below), 17. ἁμαρτάνειν ἐ. τῷ ὁμοιώματι τ. παραβάσεως Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14 (ὁμοίωμα 1). δαπανᾶν ἐ. τινι pay the expenses for someone Ac 21:24. ἀρκεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι be content w. someth. 3J 10.
    w. verbs of believing, hoping, trusting: πεποιθέναι (Wsd 3:9; Sus 35; 1 Macc 10:71; 2 Macc 7:40 and oft.) Lk 11:22; 18:9; 2 Cor 1:9; Hb 2:13 (2 Km 22:3). πιστεύειν Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16). ἐλπίζειν (2 Macc 2:18; Sir 34:7) Ro 15:12 (Is 11:10); 1 Ti 4:10; 6:17; cp. 1J 3:3. παρρησιάζεσθαι Ac 14:3.
    after verbs which express feelings, opinions, etc.: at, because of, from, with (Hom. et al.) διαταράσσεσθαι Lk 1:29. ἐκθαυμάζειν Mk 12:17. ἐκπλήσσεσθαι Mt 7:28; Mk 1:22; Lk 4:32; Ac 13:12. ἐξίστασθαι (Jdth 11:16; Wsd 5:2 al.) Lk 2:47. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι (Is 1:29) Ro 6:21. εὐφραίνεσθαι (Sir 16:1; 18:32; 1 Macc 11:44) Rv 18:20. θαμβεῖσθαι Mk 10:24; cp. Lk 5:9; Ac 3:10. θαυμάζειν (Lev 26:32; Jdth 10:7 al.; Jos., Ant. 10, 277) Mk 12:17 v.l. μακροθυμεῖν (Sir 18:11; 29:8; 35:19) Mt 18:26, 29; Lk 18:7; Js 5:7. μετανοεῖν (Plut., Ag. 803 [19, 5]; Ps.-Lucian, Salt. 84; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 7; Just., A I, 61, 10; D. 95, 3 al.) 2 Cor 12:21. ὀδυνᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 6:15) Ac 20:38. ὀργίζεσθαι Rv 12:17. σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 14:14; Lk 7:13. συλλυπεῖσθαι Mk 3:5. στυγνάζειν 10:22. χαίρειν (PEleph 13, 3; Jos., Ant. 1, 294; Tob 13:15; Bar 4:33; JosAs 4:2; Ar. 15, 7) Mt 18:13; Lk 1:14; 13:17; Ro 16:19 al. χαρὰν καὶ παράκλησιν ἔχειν Phlm 7. χαρὰ ἔσται Lk 15:7; cp. vs. 10 (Jos., Ant. 6, 116 ἡ ἐ. τῇ νίκῃ χαρά). Also w. verbs that denote aroused feelings παραζηλοῦν and παροργίζειν make jealous and angry at Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21). παρακαλεῖν 1 Th 3:7a (cp. Just., D. 78:8 παράκλησιν ἐχουσῶν ἐ.), as well as those verbs that denote an expression of the emotions ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (cp. Tob 13:15; Ps 69:5) Lk 1:47; Hs 8, 1, 18; 9, 24, 2. καυχᾶσθαι (Diod S 16, 70; Sir 30:2) Ro 5:2. κοπετὸν ποιεῖν (cp. 3 Macc 4:3) Ac 8:2. ὀλολύζειν Js 5:1. αἰνεῖν (cp. X., An. 3, 1, 45 al.) Lk 2:20. δοξάζειν (Polyb. 6, 53, 10; cp. Diod S 17, 21, 4 δόξα ἐ. ἀνδρείᾳ=fame because of bravery) Ac 4:21; 2 Cor 9:13. εὐχαριστεῖν give thanks for someth. (s. εὐχαριστέω 2; UPZ 59, 10 [168 B.C.] ἐ. τῷ ἐρρῶσθαί σε τ. θεοῖς εὐχαρίστουν) 1 Cor 1:4; cp. 2 Cor 9:15; 1 Th 3:9.—ἐφʼ ᾧ = ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὅτι for this reason that, because (Diod S 19, 98; Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §520; Ael. Aristid. 53 p. 640 D.; Synes., Ep. 73 p. 221c; Damasc., Vi. Isid. 154; Syntipas p. 12, 9; 127, 8; Thomas Mag. ἐφʼ ᾧ ἀντὶ τοῦ διότι; cp. W-S. §24, 5b and 12f. S. WKümmel, D. Bild des Menschen im NT ’48, 36–40) Ro 5:12 (SLyonnet, Biblica 36, ’55, 436–56 [denies a causal sense here]. On the probability of commercial idiom s. FDanker, FGingrich Festschr. ’72, 104f, also Ro 5:12, Sin under Law: NTS 14, ’68, 424–39; against him SPorter, TynBull 41, ’90, 3–30, also NTS 39, ’93, 321–33; difft. JFitzmyer, Anchor Bible Comm.: Romans, ad loc. ‘w. the result that all have sinned’); 2 Cor 5:4; Phil 3:12; for, indeed 4:10.
    marker of addition to what is already in existence, to, in addition to. W. dat. (Hom. et al.; PEleph 5, 17 [284/283 B.C.] μηνὸς Τῦβι τρίτῃ ἐπʼ εἰκάδι; Tob 2:14; Sir 3:27; 5:5) προσέθηκεν τοῦτο ἐ. πᾶσιν he added this to everything else Lk 3:20 (cp. Lucian, Luct. [On Funerals], 24). ἐ. τ. παρακλήσει ἡμῶν in addition to our comfort 2 Cor 7:13. λύπη ἐ. λύπῃ grief upon grief Phil 2:27 v.l. (cp. Soph., Oed. C. 544, also Polyb. 1, 57, 1 πληγὴ ἐ. πληγῇ; Plut., Mor. 123f; Polyaenus 5, 52 ἐ. φόνῳ φόνον; Quint. Smyrn. 5, 602 ἐ. πένθει πένθος=sorrow upon sorrow; Sir 26:15). ἐ. τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ to your prayer of thanks 1 Cor 14:16. So perh. also Hb 8:1. ἐ. πᾶσι τούτοις to all these Col 3:14; Lk 16:26 v.l. (X., Mem. 1, 2, 25 al.; Sir 37:15; cp. 1 Macc 10:42; Just., D. 133, 1 ἐ. τούτοις πᾶσι).—W. acc.: addition to someth. of the same kind Mt 6:27; Lk 12:25; Rv 22:18a. λύπην ἐ. λύπην sorrow upon sorrow Phil 2:27 (cp. Is 28:10, 13; Ezk 7:26; Ps 68:28).
    marker of perspective, in consideration of, in regard to, on the basis of, concerning, about, w. gen. (Antig. Car. 164 ἐ. τῶν οἴνων ἀλλοιοῦσθαι; 4 Macc. 2:9 ἐ. τῶν ἑτέρων … ἔστιν ἐπιγνῶναι τοῦτο, ὅτι …; Ath. 29, 2 τὰ ἐ. τῆς μανίας πάθη) ἐ. δύο ἢ τριῶν μαρτύρων on the evidence of two or three witnesses 1 Ti 5:19 (cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 22ff. [Stone p. 32]). Sim. in the expr. ἐ. στόματος δύο μαρτύρων (Dt 19:15) Mt 18:16; 2 Cor 13:1. ἐπʼ αὐτῆς on the basis of it Hb 7:11. ἐπʼ ἀληθείας based on truth = in accordance w. truth, truly (Demosth. 18, 17 ἐπʼ ἀληθείας οὐδεμιᾶς εἰρημένα; POxy 255, 16 [48 A.D.]; Da 2:8; Tob 8:7; En 104:11) Mk 12:14, 32; Lk 4:25; 20:21; Ac 4:27. ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ based on himself = to or by himself (X., An. 2, 4, 10; Demosth. 18, 224 ἐκρίνετο ἐφʼ ἑαυτοῦ; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verb. 16 ἐ. σεαυτοῦ. Cp. Kühner-G. I 498e) 2 Cor 10:7.—To introduce the object which is to be discussed or acted upon λέγειν ἐ. τινος speak of, about someth. (Pla., Charm., 155d, Leg. 2, 662d; Isocr. 6, 41; Aelian, VH 1, 30; Jer 35:8; EpArist 162; 170; Ath. 5:1 ἐ. τοῦ νοητοῦ … δογματίζειν) Gal 3:16. Do someth. on, in the case of (cp. 1 Esdr 1:22) σημεῖα ποιεῖν ἐ. τῶν ἀσθενούντων work miracles on the sick J 6:2.—On B 13:6 s. τίθημι 1bζ.—In ref. to someth. (Aristot., Pol. 1280a, 17; 4 Macc 12:5 τῶν ἐ. τῆς βασιλείας … πραγμάτων; Just., A I, 5, 1 ἐφʼ ἡμῶν ‘in our case’, D. 131, 4; Ath. 15, 3 ἐ. τῆς ὕλης καὶ τοῦ θεοῦ ‘as respects God and matter, so …’) ἐ. τινων δεῖ ἐγκρατεύεσθαι in certain matters one must practice self-control Hm 8:1. οὔτε … οἴδασι τὸν ἐ. τοῦ πυροῦ σπόρον nor do they comprehend (the figurative sense of) the sowing of wheat AcPlCor 2:26 (cp. 1 Cor 15:36f).
    marker of power, authority, control of or over someone or someth., over
    w. gen. (Hdt. 5, 109 al.; Mitt-Wilck. I/1, 124, 1=BGU 1120, 1 [5 B.C.] πρωτάρχῳ ἐ. τοῦ κριτηρίου; 287, 1; LXX; AscIs 2:5 τοῦ ἐ. τῶν πραγματε[ι] ῶν=Denis p. 109) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινος (Judg 9:8, 10; 1 Km 8:7) Rv 5:10. ἔχειν βασιλείαν ἐ. τῶν βασιλέων 17:18. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τινος have power over someone 20:6. διδόναι ἐξουσίαν ἐ. τινος 2:26. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινος set someone over, put someone in charge, of someth. or someone (Pla., Rep. 5, 460b; Demosth. 18, 118; Gen 39:4f; 1 Macc 6:14; 10:37; 2 Macc 12:20 al.; EpArist 281; τεταγμένος En 20:5) Mt 24:45; Lk 12:42; Ac 6:3. εἶναι ἐ. τινος (Synes., Ep. 79 p. 224d; Tob 1:22; Jdth 14:13; 1 Macc 10:69) ὸ̔ς ἦν ἐ. πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς who was in charge of all her treasure 8:27. Of God ὁ ὢν ἐ. πάντων (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13) Ro 9:5; cp. Eph 4:6. ὁ ἐ. τινος w. ὤν to be supplied (Demosth. 18, 247 al.; Diod S 13, 47, 6; Plut., Pyrrh. 385 [5, 7], Aemil. Paul. 267 [23, 6]; PTebt 5, 88 [118 B.C.] ὁ ἐ. τ. προσόδων; 1 Macc 6:28; 2 Macc 3:7; 3 Macc 6:30 al.; EpArist 110; 174) ὁ ἐ. τοῦ κοιτῶνος the chamberlain Ac 12:20.
    w dat. (X., Cyr. 1, 2, 5; 2, 4, 25 al., An. 4, 1, 13; Demosth. 19, 113; Aeschines 2, 73; Esth 8:12e; Just., A II, 5, 2 ἀγγέλοις οὓς ἐ. τούτοις ἔταξε; cp. Ath. 24, 3; Ath. 6, 4 τὸν ἐ. τῇ κινήσει τοῦ σώματος λόγον) Mt 24:47; Lk 12:44.
    w. acc. (X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Dionys. Byz. §56 θεῷ ἐ. πάντα δύναμις; LXX; PsSol 17:3, 32) βασιλεύειν ἐ. τινα rule over someone (Gen 37:8; Judg 9:15 B al.) Lk 1:33; 19:14, 27; Ro 5:14. καθιστάναι τινὰ ἐ. τινα set someone over someone (X., Cyr. 4, 5, 58) κριτὴν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς as judge over you Lk 12:14; ἡγούμενον ἐπʼ Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:10; cp. Hb 2:7 v.l. (Ps 8:7); 3:6; 10:21. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν ἐ. τι Rv 16:9. ἐξουσίαν διδόναι ἐ. τι (Sir 33:20) Lk 9:1; 10:19; Rv 6:8; cp. 22:14. φυλάσσειν φυλακὰς ἐ. τι Lk 2:8 (cp. En 100:5). ὑπεραίρεσθαι ἐ. τινα exalt oneself above someone 2 Th 2:4 (cp. Da 11:36); but here the mng. against is also poss. (s. 12b below). πιστὸς ἐ. τι faithful over someth. Mt 25:21, 23.
    marker of legal proceeding, before, w. acc. in the lang. of the law-courts ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἄγεσθαι be brought before governors and kings Mt 10:18; cp. Lk 21:12 (cp. BGU 22, 36 [114 A.D.] ἀξιῶ ἀκθῆναι [=ἀχθῆναι] τ. ἐνκαλουμένους ἐ. σὲ πρὸς δέουσαν ἐπέξοδον; Just., A II, 2, 12 ἐ. Οὔρβικον). ὑπάγεις ἐπʼ ἄρχοντα you are going before the magistrate Lk 12:58; cp. Ac 16:19. ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐ. τὸν Πιλᾶτον Lk 23:1. ἐ. τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Ac 9:21. ἐ. Καίσαρα πορεύεσθαι come before the emperor 25:12. ἐ. τὰς συναγωγάς Lk 12:11. ἐ. τὸ βῆμα Ac 18:12. Cp. 3 above. Here the focus is on transfer to the judiciary.
    marker of purpose, goal, result, to, for, w. acc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 3 Jac. ἐ. κατοικίαν) ἐ. τὸ βάπτισμα for baptism=to have themselves baptized Mt 3:7 (cp. Just., A I, 61, 10 ἐ. τὸ λουτρόν; D. 56, 1 ἐ. τὴν … κρίσιν πεμφθεῖσι). ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν ταύτην for (i.e. to see) this sight Lk 23:48 (sim. Hom. et al.; POxy 294, 18 [22 A.D.]; LXX; Tat. 23, 2 ἐ. τὴν θέαν). ἐ. τὸ συμφέρον to (our) advantage Hb 12:10 (cp. Tat. 6, 1; 34, 2 οὐκ ἐ. τι χρήσιμον ‘to no purpose’). ἐ. σφαγήν Ac 8:32 (Is 53:7); cp. Mt 22:5; ἐ. τ. τελειότητα Hb 6:1. ἐ. τοῦτο for this (X., An. 2, 5, 22; Jos., Ant. 12, 23) Lk 4:43. ἐφʼ ὅ; for what (reason)? Mt 26:50 v.l. (s. ὅς 1bα and 1iβ). Cp. 16.
    marker of hostile opposition, against
    w. dat. (Hom. et al.; 2 Macc 13:19; Sir 28:23 v.l.; fig. Ath. 22, 7 τοὺς ἐπʼ αὐτοῖς λόγους ‘counter-evidence’) Lk 12:52f (s. use of acc. b below); Ac 11:19. Cp. J 8:7 v.l. (1bβ above).
    w. acc. (Hdt. 1, 71; X., Hell. 3, 4, 20 al.; Jos., Ant. 13, 331; LXX; En; TestJud 3:1 al.; JosAs 19:2; Just., D. 103, 7; Tat. 36, 2) ὥρμησαν ἐ. αὐτόν Ac 7:57. ἔρχεσθαι Lk 14:31. ἐπαναστήσονται τέκνα ἐ. γονεῖς Mt 10:21; Mk 13:12; cp. ἔθνος ἐ. ἔθνος Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8. ἐφʼ ἑαυτόν divided against himself Mt 12:26; Mk 3:24f, 26; Lk 11:17f; cp. J 13:18 (s. Ps 40:10); Ac 4:27; 13:50 al.—Lk 12:53 (4 times; the first and third occurrences w. the acc. are prob. influenced by usage in Mic 7:6; the use of the dat. Lk 12:52f [s. a above] w. a verb expressing a circumstance is in accord with older Gk. [Il. et al.], which prefers the acc. with verbs of motion in ref. to hostility). Cp. 15.
    marker of number or measure, w. acc. (Hdt. et. al.; LXX; GrBar 3:6) ἐ. τρίς (CIG 1122, 9; PHolm α18) three times Ac 10:16; 11:10. So also ἐ. πολύ more than once Hm 4, 1, 8. ἐ. πολύ (also written ἐπιπολύ) in a different sense to a great extent, carefully (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Lucian, D. Deor. 6, 2; 25, 2; 3 Macc 5:17; Jos., Ant. 17, 107) B 4:1. ἐ. πλεῖον to a greater extent, further (Hdt., Thu. et al.; Diod S 11, 60, 5 al.; prob. 2 Macc 12:36; TestGad 7:2; Ar. 4, 3; Ath. 7, 1 ἐ. το πλεῖστον) 2 Ti 3:9; 1 Cl 18:3 (Ps 50:4). ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον 2 Ti 3:13. ἐφʼ ὅσον to the degree that, in so far as (Diod S 1, 93, 2; Maximus Tyr. 11, 3c ἐφʼ ὅσον δύναται; Hierocles 14 p. 451) Mt 25:40, 45; B 4:11; 17:1; Ro 11:13.
    marker indicating the one to whom, for whom, or about whom someth. is done, to, on, about
    w. dat. πράσσειν τι ἐ. τινι do someth. to someone Ac 5:35 (thus Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 15 §51; cp. δρᾶν τι ἐ. τινι Hdt. 3, 14; Aelian, NA 11, 11); about γεγραμμένα ἐπʼ αὐτῷ J 12:16 (cp. Hdt. 1, 66). προφητεύειν ἐ. τινι Rv 10:11. μαρτυρεῖν bear witness about Hb 11:4; Rv 22:16. ἐ. σοὶ … φανερώσει κύριος τὸ λύτρον the Lord will reveal the salvation to you GJs 7:2.
    w. acc.
    α. ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν γεγόνει τὸ σημεῖον the man on whom the miracle had been performed Ac 4:22 (cp. Just., D. 128, 1 κρίσεως γεγενημένης ἐ. Σόδομα). ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν λέγεται ταῦτα the one about whom this was said Hb 7:13 (cp. ἐ. πόρρω οὖσαν [γενεὰν] ἐγὼ λαλῶ En 1:2). γέγραπται ἐπʼ αὐτόν Mk 9:12f; cp. Ro 4:9; 1 Ti 1:18; βάλλειν κλῆρον ἐ. τι for someth. Mk 15:24; J 19:24 (Ps 21:19). ἀνέβη ὁ κλῆρος ἐ. Συμεών the lot came up in favor of Simeon GJs 24:4.
    β. of powers, conditions, etc., which come upon someone or under whose influence someone is: on, upon, to, over ἐγένετο ῥῆμα θεοῦ ἐ. Ἰωάννην the word of God came to John Lk 3:2 (cp. Jer 1:1). Of divine blessings (cp. En 1:8; ParJer 5:28) Mt 10:13; 12:28; Lk 10:6; 11:20; cp. 10:9; Ac 10:10. ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπʼ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τ. Χριστοῦ that the power of Christ may rest upon me 2 Cor 12:9. χάρις θεοῦ ἦν ἐπʼ αὐτό Lk 2:40. Various verbs are used in ref. to the Holy Spirit, either in pass. or act. role, in connection w. ἐ. τινα: ἐκχεῖν Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f); cp. 10:45; Tit 3:6. ἀποστέλλειν (ἐξαποστέλλειν v.l.) Lk 24:49. ἐπέρχεσθαι 1:35; Ac 1:8 (Just., D. 87, 3; cp. ἔρχεσθαι A I, 33, 6; D. 49, 7 ἀπὸ τοῦ Ἠλίου ἐ. τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐλθεῖν). ἐπιπίπτειν 10:44. καταβαίνειν Lk 3:22; J 1:33. τίθεσθαι Mt 12:18 (cp. Is 42:1). Also εἶναι Lk 2:25. μένειν J 1:32f. ἀναπαύεσθαι 1 Pt 4:14. Of unpleasant or startling experiences Lk 1:12, 65; 4:36; Ac 13:11; 19:17; Rv 11:11.—Lk 19:43; 21:35, cp. vs. 34; J 18:4; Eph 5:6; cp. Rv 3:3.—Ro 2:2, 9; 15:3 (Ps 68:10). Of the blood of the righteous, that comes over or upon the murderers Mt 23:35; 27:25; Ac 5:28. Of care, which one casts on someone else 1 Pt 5:7 (Ps 54:23).
    marker of feelings directed toward someone, in, on, for, toward, w. acc., after words that express belief, trust, hope: πιστεύειν ἐ. τινα, w. acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 16:4 al.) Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19; Ro 4:24. πίστις Hb 6:1. πεποιθέναι (Is 58:14) Mt 27:43; 2 Th 3:4; 2 Cor 2:3. ἐλπίζειν (1 Ch 5:20; 2 Ch 13:18 al.; PsSol 9:10; 17:3; Just., D. 16:4 al.) 1 Pt 1:13; 1 Ti 5:5. After words that characterize an emotion or its expression: for κόπτεσθαι (Zech 12:10) Rv 1:7; 18:9. κλαίειν Lk 23:28; Rv 18:9 (cp. JosAs 15:9 χαρήσεται ἐ. σέ). σπλαγχνίζεσθαι Mt 15:32; Mk 8:2; 9:22; Hm 4, 3, 5; Hs 9, 24, 2. χρηστός toward Lk 6:35. χρηστότης Ro 11:22; Eph 2:7; cp. Ro 9:23. Esp. also if the feelings or their expressions are of a hostile nature: toward, against (cp. λοιδορεῖν Just., D. 137, 2) ἀποτομία Ro 11:22. μαρτύριον Lk 9:5. μάρτυς ἐ. τ. ἐμὴν ψυχήν a witness against my soul (cp. Dssm., LO 258; 355 [LAE 304; 417]) 2 Cor 1:23. ἀσχημονεῖν 1 Cor 7:36. μοιχᾶσθαι Mk 10:11. τολμᾶν 2 Cor 10:2 (En 7:4). βρύχειν τ. ὀδόντας Ac 7:54. Cp. 12.
    marker of object or purpose, with dat. in ref. to someth. (Hom., Thu. et al.; SIG 888, 5 ἐ. τῇ τῶν ἀνθρ. σωτηρίᾳ; PTebt 44, 6 [114 B.C.] ὄντος μου ἐ. θεραπείᾳ ἐν τῷ Ἰσιείω; LXX; TestJob 3:5 ὁ ἐ. τῇ σωτηρίᾳ τῆς ἐμῆς ψυχῆς ἐλθών; Jos., Ant. 5, 101; Just., A I, 29, 1 ἐ. παίδων ἀναστροφῇ; D. 91, 4 ἐ. σωτηρίᾳ τῶν πιστευόντων) καλείν τινα ἐ. τινι call someone for someth. Gal 5:13 (on ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ cp. Demosth. 23, 124; [59], 32); ἐ. ἀκαθαρσίᾳ for impurity, i.e. so that we should be impure 1 Th 4:7. κτισθέντες ἐ. ἔργοις ἀγαθοῖς for good deeds Eph 2:10. λογομαχεῖν ἐ. καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων for the ruin of those who hear 2 Ti 2:14 (cp. Eur., Hipp. 511; X., Mem. 2, 3, 19 ἐ. βλάβη; Hdt. 1, 68 ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου; Polyb. 27, 7, 13 and PGM 4, 2440 ἐπʼ ἀγαθῷ=‘for good’). Cp. 11.
    marker in idiom of authorization, w. dat.: the formula ἐ. τῷ ὀνοματί τινος, in the name of someone, used w. many verbs (Just., D. 39, 6 w. γίνεσθαι, otherw. ἐ. ὀνόματος, e.g. A I, 61, 13; w. διὰ τοῦ ὀ. and in oaths κατὰ τοῦ ὀ. A II, 6, 6, D. 30, 3; 85, 2.—Ath. 23, 1 ἐ. ὀνόματι εἰδώλων.—ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι LXX; JosAs 9:1), focuses on the authorizing function of the one named in the gen. (cp. WHeitmüller [‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903, 13ff], ‘in connection with, or by the use of, i.e. naming, or calling out, or calling upon the name’ [88]): βαπτίζειν Ac 2:38. δέχεσθαί τινα Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48. διδάσκειν Ac 4:18; 5:28. δύναμιν ποιεῖν Mk 9:39. ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἔρχεσθαι Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν 24:47. λαλεῖν Ac 4:17; 5:40. Semantically divergent from the preceding, but formulaically analogous, is καλεῖν τινα ἐ. τῷ ὀν. τινος name someone after someone (2 Esdr 17:63) Lk 1:59.—ὄνομα 1dγג.—M-M.
    marker of temporal associations, in the time of, at, on, for
    w. gen., time within which an event or condition takes place (Hom.+) in the time of, under (kings or other rulers): in the time of Elisha Lk 4:27 (cp. Just., D. 46, 6 ἐ. Ἠλίου). ἐ. τῆς μετοικεσίας at the time of the exile Mt 1:11. Under=during the rule or administration of (Hes., Op. 111; Hdt. 6, 98 al.; OGI 90, 15; PAmh 43, 2 [173 B.C.]; UPZ 162 V, 5 [117 B.C.]; 1 Esdr 2:12; 1 Macc 13:42; 2 Macc 15:22; Jos., Ant. 12, 156 ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ὀ.) ἐ. Ἀβιαθὰρ ἀρχιερέως under, in the time of, Abiathar the high priest Mk 2:26. ἐ. ἀρχιερέως Ἅννα καὶ Καιάφα Lk 3:2. ἐ. Κλαυδίου Ac 11:28 (Just., A I, 26, 2). ἐ. τῶν πατέρων in the time of the fathers 1 Cl 23:3. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν in the last days (Gen 49:1; Num 24:14; Mi 4:1; Jer 37:24; Da 10:14) 2 Pt 3:3; Hs 9, 12, 3; cp. Hb 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τοῦ χρόνου in the last time Jd 18. ἐπʼ ἐσχάτου τῶν χρόνων at the end of the times/ages 1 Pt 1:20. ἐ. τῶν προσευχῶν μου when I pray, in my prayers (cp. PTebt 58, 31 [111 B.C.] ἐ. τ. διαλόγου, ‘in the discussion’; 4 Macc 15:19 ἐ. τ. βασάνων ‘during the tortures’; Sir 37:29; 3 Macc 5:40; Demetr.: 722, Fgm. 1, 14 Jac. ἐ. τοῦ ἀρίστου; Synes., Ep. 121 p. 258c ἐ. τῶν κοινῶν ἱερῶν) Ro 1:10; Eph 1:16; 1 Th 1:2; Phlm 4.
    w. dat., time at or during which (Hom. et al.; PTebt 5, 66 [118 B.C.]; PAmh 157; LXX; Just., A I, 13, 3 ἐ. χρόνοις Τίερίου) at, in, at the time of, during: ἐ. τοῖς νῦν χρόνοις in these present times 2 Cl 19:4. ἐ. τῇ πρώτῃ διαθήκῃ at the time of the first covenant Hb 9:15. ἐ. συντελείᾳ τ. αἰώνων at the close of the age 9:26 (Tat. 13, 1 ἐ. ς. τοῦ κόσμου; cp. Sir 22:10 and PLond III, 954, 18 p. 154 [260 A.D.] ἐ. τέλει τ. χρόνου; POxy 275, 20 [66 A.D.] ἐ. συνκλεισμῷ τ. χρόνου; En 27:3 ἐπʼ ἐσχάτοις αἰώσιν). ἐ. τῇ θυσίᾳ at the time of, together with, the sacrifice Phil 2:17. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν at every remembrance of you Phil 1:3. ἐ. παροργισμῷ ὑμῶν during your wrath, i.e. while you are angry Eph 4:26. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ in all (our) distress 1 Th 3:7b. ἐ. πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει 2 Cor 1:4. ἐ. τούτῳ in the meanwhile J 4:27 (Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2, cp. Philops. 14 p. 41; Syntipas p. 76, 2 ἐφʼ ἡμέραις ἑπτα; 74, 6).
    w. acc.
    α. answering the question ‘when?’ on: ἐ. τὴν αὔριον (Sb 6011, 14 [I B.C.]; PRyl 441 ἐ. τὴν ἐπαύριον) (on) the next day Lk 10:35; Ac 4:5. ἐ. τὴν ὥραν τ. προσευχῆς at the hour of prayer 3:1 (Polyaenus 8, 17 ἐ. ὥραν ὡρισμένην).
    β. answering the qu. ‘how long?’ for, over a period of (Hom. et al.; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 170, 8=BGU 1058, 9 [13 B.C.]; POxy 275, 9; 15 ἐ. τὸν ὅλον χρόνον; PTebt 381, 19 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον περίεστιν ἡ μήτηρ; LXX; En 106:15; TestJob 30:2 ἐ. ὥρας τρεῖς; TestJud 3:4; TestGad 5:11; Jos., Ant. 11, 2; Just., D. 142, 1 ἐ. ποσόν ‘for awhile’) ἐ. ἔτη τρία for three years (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 2, 1 Jac.) Lk 4:25. ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας for three days (Diod S 13, 19, 2; Arrian, Anab. 4, 9, 4; GDI 4706, 119 [Thera] ἐπʼ ἀμέρας τρεῖς) GPt 8:30 al. ἐ. ἡμέρας πλείους over a period of many days (Jos., Ant. 4, 277) Ac 13:31.—16:18 (ἐ. πολλὰς ἡμέρας as Appian, Liby. 29 §124; cp. Diod S 3, 16, 4); 17:2; 19:8, 10, 34; 27:20; Hb 11:30. ἐ. χρόνον for a while (cp. Il. 2, 299; Hdt. 9, 22, 1; Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1257; Jos., Vi. 2) Lk 18:4. ἐ. πλείονα χρόνον (Diod S 3, 16, 6; Hero Alex. I p. 344, 17) Ac 18:20. ἐφʼ ὅσον χρόνον as long as Ro 7:1; 1 Cor 7:39; Gal 4:1. Also ἐφʼ ὅσον as long as Mt 9:15; 2 Pt 1:13 (for other mngs. of ἐφʼ ὅσον s. above under 13). ἐφʼ ἱκανόν (sc. χρόνον) for a considerable time (EpArist 109) Ac 20:11. ἐ. χρόνον ἱκανόν Qua. ἐ. πολύ for a long time, throughout a long period of time (Thu. 1, 7; 1, 18, 1; 2, 16, 1 al.; Appian, Liby. 5 §21; Arrian, Cyneg. 23, 1; Lucian, Toxar. 20; Wsd 18:20; Sir 49:13; JosAs 19:3; Jos., Vi. 66: Just., A I, 65, 3) Ac 28:6. ἐ. πλεῖον the same (schol. on Pind., N. 7, 56b; PLille 3, 16 [III B.C.]; Jdth 13:1; Sir prol. l. 7; Jos., Ant. 18, 150) Ac 20:9; any longer (Lucian, D. Deor. 5, 3; Appian, Hann. 54 §227; 3 Macc 5:8; Wsd 8:12; Ath. 12, 3) Ac 24:4; 1 Cl 55:1.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπί

  • 7 τέκνον

    τέκνον, ου, τό (τίκτω ‘engender, bear’; Hom.+ ‘child’)
    an offspring of human parents, child
    without ref. to sex Mt 10:21a (on the complete dissolution of family ties s. Lucian, Cal. 1; GrBar 4:17; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 23 Tdf.; Just., A I, 27, 3f; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 43, 25 [Job’s children]); Mk 13:12a; Lk 1:7; Ac 7:5; Rv 12:4. Pl. Mt 7:11; 10:21b; 18:25; 19:29; 22:24 (=σπέρμα, cp. Dt 25:5f, but σπ. and τ. are contrasted Ro 9:7); Mk 13:12b; Lk 1:17; 14:26; 1 Cor 7:14 (on the baptism of children s. HWood, EncRelEth II 392ff; JLeipoldt, D. urchr. Taufe 1928, 73–78; AOepke, LIhmels Festschr. 1928, 84–100, ZNW 29, 1930, 81–111 [against him HWindisch, ZNW 28, 1929, 118–42]; JJeremias, Hat d. Urkirche d. Kindertaufe geübt? ’38; 2d ed. ’49; Die Kindert. in d. ersten 4 Jhdtn. ’58; revisited D. Anfänge d. Kindert. ’62; s. also ZNW 40, ’42, 243–45. KAl-and, D. Saülingst. im NT u. in d. alten Kirche ’62, 2d ed. ’63; Die Stellung d. Kinder in d. frühe christl. Gemeinden, und ihre Taufe ’67. KBarth, Z. kirchl. Lehre v. d. Taufe2 ’43; D. Taufe als Begründung d. christlichen Lebens in Kirchliche Dogmatik IV, 4, ’67; for discussion of Barth’s views, s. EJüngel, K. Barths Lehre v. d. Taufe ’68; KViering (ed.), Zu K. Barth’s Lehre v. d. Taufe ’71; K. Aland, Taufe u. Kindertaufe ’71; HHubert, D. Streit um d. Kindertaufe, ’72. FFr̓vig, TTK 11, ’40, 124–31; EMolland, NorTT 43, ’42, 1–23; F-JLeenhardt, Le Baptème chrétien ’46; OCullmann, D. Tauflehre d. NT ’48; P-HMenoud, Verbum Caro 2, ’48, 15–26; HSchlier, TLZ 72, ’47, 321–26; GFleming, Baptism in the NT ’49; GBeasley-Murray, Baptism in the New Testament ’62; WKümmel, TRu 18, ’50, 32–47; GDelling, D. Taufe im NT ’63; EDinkler, Die Taufaussagen d. NT ’71 [in: KViering, s. above, 60–153]; JDidier, Le baptême des enfants ’59; HKraft, Texte z. Gesch. d. Taufe bes. d. Kindert. i. d. alten Kirche, Kl. T. no. 174, 2d ed. ’69); 2 Cor 12:14ab (simile); 1 Th 2:7 (simile), 11 (simile); 1 Ti 3:4, 12; 5:4 al. In the table of household duties (s. MDibelius Hdb. exc. after Col 4:1; KWeidinger, Die Haustafeln 1928) Eph 6:1 (τὰ τέκνα voc.), 4; Col 3:20 (τὰ τ. voc.), 21. In the case of φονεῖς τέκνων B 20:2; D 5:2, what follows shows that murders of their own children are meant.—The unborn fetus is also called τέκνον B 19:5; D 2:2 (like παιδίον: Hippocr., π. σαρκ. 6 vol. VIII 592 L. On Jesus’ attitude toward children, cp. JKalogerakos, Aristoteles’ Bild von der Frau: ΠΛΑΤΩΝ 46, ’94, 159–83, esp. p. 174 and notes [cp. Aristot., EN 1161b].).
    The sex of the child can be made clear by the context, son (Herodian 7, 10, 7; PGen 74, 1ff; PAmh 136, 1f; POxy 930, 18; Jos., Ant. 14, 196; Just., D. 56, 5; 134, 4) Mt 21:28a; Phil 2:22 (simile); Rv 12:5; GJs 22;3. The voc. τέκνον as an affectionate address to a son Mt 21:28b; Lk 2:48; 15:31. In a more general sense the pl. is used for
    descendants from a common ancestor, descendants, posterity Ῥαχὴλ κλαίουσα τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς Mt 2:18 (Jer 38:15).—27:25; Ac 2:39; 13:33. A rich man is addressed by his ancestor Abraham as τέκνον Lk 16:25. τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός the physical descendants Ro 9:8a.
    one who is dear to another but without genetic relationship and without distinction in age, child
    in the voc. gener. as a form of familiar address my child, my son (Herodian 1, 6, 4; ParJer 5:30; Achilles Tat. 8, 4, 3. Directed to fully grown persons, Vi. Aesopi G 60 P., where a peasant addresses Aesop in this way) Mt 9:2; Mk 2:5.
    of a spiritual child in relation to master, apostle, or teacher (PGM 4, 475.—Eunap. p. 70 the sophist applies this term to his students) 2 Ti 1:2; Phlm 10. τέκνον ἐν κυρίῳ 1 Cor 4:17. τέκ. ἐν πίστει 1 Ti 1:2. τέκ. κατὰ κοινὴν πίστιν Tit 1:4. Pl. 1 Cor 4:14; 2 Cor 6:13; 3J 4. In direct address (voc.): sing. (on dir. address in the sing. cp. Sir 2:1 and oft.; Herm. Wr. 13, 2ab; PGM 13, 226; 233; 742; 755.—S. also Norden, Agn. Th. 290f; Boll 138f): 1 Ti 1:18; 2 Ti 2:1; D 3:1, 3–6; 4:1. Pl.: Mk 10:24; B 15:4.—1 Cl 22:1 understands the τέκνα of Ps 33:12 as a word of Christ to Christians. Cp. B 9:3. The address in Gal 4:19 is intended metaphorically for children for whom Paul is once more undergoing the pains of childbirth.—The adherents of false teachers are also called their τέκνα Rv 2:23.
    of the members of a congregation 2J 1; 4; 13. In Hermas the venerable lady, who embodies the Christian communities, addresses the believers as τέκνα Hv 3, 9, 1. In Gal 4:31 οὐκ ἐσμὲν παιδίσκης τέκνα ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐλευθέρας posts a dramatic image = ‘we belong not to a community dependent on the rules of Sinai, but to one that adheres to the promises made to Abraham’.
    one who has the characteristics of another being, child
    of those who exhibit virtues of ancient worthies: children of Abraham Mt 3:9; Lk 3:8; J 8:39; Ro 9:7. True Christian women are children of Sarah 1 Pt 3:6.
    of those who exhibit characteristics of transcendent entities: the believers are (τὰ) τέκνα (τοῦ) θεοῦ (cp. Is 63:8; Wsd 16:21; SibOr 5, 202; Just., D. 123, 9; 124, 1. On the subj. matter s. HHoltzmann, Ntl. Theologie I2 1911, 54; Bousset, Rel.3 377f; ADieterich, Mithrasliturgie 1903, 141ff; Hdb. on J 1:12; WGrundmann, Die Gotteskindschaft in d. Gesch. Jesu u. ihre relgesch. Voraussetzungen ’38; WTwisselmann, D. Gotteskindsch. der Christen nach dem NT ’39; SLegasse, Jésus et L’enfant [synopt.], ’69), in Paul as those adopted by God Ro 8:16f, 21; 9:7, 8b (opp. σπέρμα); Phil 2:15, s. also Eph 5:1; in John as those begotten by God J 1:12; 11:52; 1J 3:1f, 10a; 5:2. Corresp. τὰ τέκνα τοῦ διαβόλου 1J 3:10b (on this subj. s. Hdb. on J 8:44).—Cp. Ac 17:28, where the idea of kinship w. deity is complex because of semantic components not shared by polytheists and those within Israelite tradition.—Cp. 6 below.
    inhabitants of a city, children, an Hebraistic expression (Rdm.2 p. 28; Mlt-H. 441; s. Jo 2:23; Zech 9:13; Bar 4:19, 21, 25 al.; 1 Macc 1:38; PsSol 11:2) Mt 23:37; Lk 13:34; 19:44; Gal 4:25.
    a class of persons with a specific characteristic, children of. τ. is used w. abstract terms (for this Hebraism s. prec.; ἀνάγκης, ἀγνοίας Just., A I, 61, 10) τέκνα ἀγάπης B 9:7; ἀγ. καὶ εἰρήνης 21:9 (ἀγάπη 1bα). εὐφροσύνης 7:1 (s. εὐφροσύνη). δικαιοσύνης AcPlCor 2:19. κατάρας 2 Pt 2:14 (s. κατάρα). ὀργῆς Eph 2:3; AcPlCor 2:19. ὑπακοῆς 1 Pt 1:14. φωτός Eph 5:8; cp. IPhld 2:1. On the ‘children of wisdom’, i.e. those who attach themselves to her and let themselves be led by her Mt 11:19 v.l.; Lk 7:35 s. δικαιόω 2bα. Cp. 4b above.—Billerbeck I 219f, 371–74; BHHW II 947–49; III 1935–37.—DELG s.v. τίκτω. Frisk. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > τέκνον

  • 8 θεός

    θεός, οῦ (Hom.+; Herm. Wr.; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph.) and ἡ, voc. θεέ (Pisidian ins [JHS 22, 1902, 355] θέ; PGM 4, 218 θεὲ θεῶν; 7, 529 κύριε θεὲ μέγιστε; 12, 120 κύριε θεέ; 13, 997; LXX [Thackeray 145; PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 152f]; ApcMos 42; Jos., Ant. 14, 24 ὦ θεὲ βασιλεῦ τ. ὅλων; SibOr 13, 172 βασιλεῦ κόσμου θεέ) Mt 27:46, more frequently (s. 2 and 3c, h below) ὁ θεός (LXX; ParJer 6:12; ApcEsdr 7:5; ApcMos 32; B-D-F §147, 3m; JWackernagel, Über einige antike Anredeformen 1912; Mlt-H. 120). On the inclusion or omission of the art. gener. s. W-S. §19, 13d; B-D-F §254, 1; 268, 2; Rob. 758; 761; 780; 786; 795; Mlt-Turner 174; BWeiss, D. Gebr. des Artikels bei den Gottesnamen, StKr 84, 1911, 319–92; 503–38 (also published separately). The sg. article freq. suggests personal claim on a deity. ‘God, god’.
    In the Gr-Rom. world the term θεός primarily refers to a transcendent being who exercises extraordinary control in human affairs or is responsible for bestowal of unusual benefits, deity, god, goddess (s. on θεά) Ac 28:6; 2 Th 2:4 (cp. SibOr 5, 34 ἰσάζων θεῷ αὐτόν; Ar. 4, 1 οὐκ εἰσὶ θεοί; Tat. 10, 1 θεὸς … κύκνος γίνεται …; Ath. 18, 3 θεός τις δισώματος); θεὸς Ῥαιφάν Ac 7:43 (Am 5:26; s. entry Ῥαιφάν). οὐδεὶς θεὸς εἰ μὴ εἷς there is no god but one 1 Cor 8:4 (cp. AcPl Ha 1, 17 restored). θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου Ac 12:22.—ἡ θεός the (female) god, goddess (Att., later more rarely; Peripl. Eryth. c. 58; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 17, 2; SIG 695, 28; ins, one of which refers to Artemis, in Hauser p. 81f; Jos., Ant. 9, 19; Ar. 11, 2 [Artemis]; Ath. 29, 2 [Ino]) Ac 19:37.—Pl. Ac 7:40 (Ex 32:1). Cp. 14:11; 19:26; PtK 2 p. 14, 21. εἴπερ εἰσὶν λεγόμενοι θεοί even if there are so-called gods 1 Cor 8:5a; s. vs. 5b (on θεοὶ πολλοί cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 149.—Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a: θ. πολλοί w. εἷς θ. πατήρ). οἱ φύσει μὴ ὄντες θεοί those who by nature are not really gods Gal 4:8b (cp. Ar. 4, 2 μὴ εἶναι τὸν οὐρανὸν θεόν al.). θεοὶ … λίθινοι etc. AcPl Ha 1, 18 (cp. JosAs 10:13 τοὺς χρυσοῦς καὶ ἀργυροῦς). Of the devil μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15.
    Some writings in our lit. use the word θ. w. ref. to Christ (without necessarily equating Christ with the Father, and therefore in harmony w. the Shema of Israel Dt 6:4; cp. Mk 10:18 and 4a below), though the interpretation of some of the pass. is in debate. In Mosaic and Gr-Rom. traditions the fundamental semantic component in the understanding of deity is the factor of performance, namely saviorhood or extraordinary contributions to one’s society. Dg. 10:6 defines the ancient perspective: ὸ̔ς ἃ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ λάβων ἔχει, ταῦτα τοῖς ἐπιδεομένοις χορηγῶν, θεὸς γίνεται τῶν λαμβανάντων one who ministers to the needy what one has received from God proves to be a god to the recipients (cp. Sb III, 6263, 27f of a mother). Such understanding led to the extension of the mng. of θ. to pers. who elicit special reverence (cp. pass. under 4 below; a similar development can be observed in the use of σέβομαι and cognates). In Ro 9:5 the interpr. is complicated by demand of punctuation marks in printed texts. If a period is placed before ὁ ὢν κτλ., the doxology refers to God as defined in Israel (so EAbbot, JBL 1, 1881, 81–154; 3, 1883, 90–112; RLipsius; HHoltzmann, Ntl. Theol.2 II 1911, 99f; EGünther, StKr 73, 1900, 636–44; FBurkitt, JTS 5, 1904, 451–55; Jülicher; PFeine, Theol. d. NTs6 ’34, 176 et al.; RSV text; NRSV mg.). A special consideration in favor of this interpretation is the status assigned to Christ in 1 Cor 15:25–28 and the probability that Paul is not likely to have violated the injunction in Dt 5:7.—If a comma is used in the same place, the reference is to Christ (so BWeiss; EBröse, NKZ 10, 1899, 645–57 et al.; NRSV text; RSV mg. S. also εἰμί 1.—Undecided: THaering.—The transposition by the Socinian scholar JSchlichting [died 1661] ὧν ὁ=‘to whom belongs’ was revived by JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 363; WWrede, Pls 1905, 82; CStrömman, ZNW 8, 1907, 319f). In 2 Pt 1:1; 1J 5:20 the interpretation is open to question (but cp. ISmyrna McCabe.0010, 100 ὁ θεὸς καὶ σωτὴρ Ἀντίοχος). In any event, θ. certainly refers to Christ, as one who manifests primary characteristics of deity, in the foll. NT pass.: J 1:1b (w. ὁ θεός 1:1a, which refers to God in the monotheistic context of Israel’s tradition. On the problem raised by such attribution s. J 10:34 [cp. Ex 7:1; Ps 81:6]; on θεός w. and without the article, acc. to whether it means God or the Logos, s. Philo, Somn. 1, 229f; JGriffiths, ET 62, ’50/51, 314–16; BMetzger, ET 63, ’51/52, 125f), 18b. ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου my Lord and my God! (nom. w. art.=voc.; s. beg. of this entry.—On a resurrection as proof of divinity cp. Diog. L. 8, 41, who quotes Hermippus: Pythagoras returns from a journey to Hades and appears among his followers [εἰσέρχεσθαι εἰς τὴν ἐκκλησίαν], and they consider him θεῖόν τινα) J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. 3c below). Tit 2:13 (μέγας θ.). Hb 1:8, 9 (in a quot. fr. Ps 44:7, 8). S. TGlasson, NTS 12, ’66, 270–72. Jd 5 P72. But above all Ignatius calls Christ θεός in many pass.: θεὸς Ἰησοῦς Χριστός ITr 7:1; Χριστὸς θεός ISm 10:1. ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν IEph ins; 15:3; 18:2; IRo ins (twice); 3:3; IPol 8:3; τὸ πάθος τοῦ θεοῦ μου IRo 6:3. ἐν αἵματι θεοῦ IEph 1:1. ἐν σαρκὶ γενόμενος θεός 7:2. θεὸς ἀνθρωπίνως φανερούμενος 19:3. θεὸς ὁ οὕτως ὑμᾶς σοφίσας ISm 1:1.—Hdb. exc. 193f; MRackl, Die Christologie d. hl. Ign. v. Ant. 1914. ὁ θεός μου Χριστὲ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 10; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ θ[εός] 6, 24; cp. ln. 34 (also cp. Just., A I, 63, 15, D. 63, 5 al.; Tat. 13, 3; Ath. 24, 1; Mel., P. 4, 28 al.).—SLösch, Deitas Jesu u. antike Apotheose ’33. Cp. AWlosk, Römischer Kaiserkult ’78.
    God in Israelite/Christian monotheistic perspective, God the predom. use, somet. with, somet. without the art.
    ὁ θεός Mt 1:23; 3:9; 5:8, 34; Mk 2:12; 10:18; 13:19 (cp. TestJob 37:4); Lk 2:13; J 3:2b; Ac 2:22b; Gal 2:6 al. With prep. εἰς τὸν θ. Ac 24:15. ἐκ τοῦ θ. J 8:42b, 47; 1J 3:9f; 4:1ff, 6f; 5:1, 4; 2 Cor 3:5; 5:18 al.; ἐν τῷ θ. Ro 5:11; Col 3:3 (Ath. 21, 1). ἔναντι τοῦ θ. Lk 1:8; ἐπὶ τὸν θ. Ac 15:19; 26:18, 20 (Just., D. 101, 1); ἐπὶ τῷ θ. Lk 1:47 (Just., D. 8, 2); παρὰ τοῦ θ. J 8:40 (Ar. 4, 2; Just., A I, 33, 6 al.; without art. Just., D. 69, 6 al.). παρὰ τῷ θ. Ro 2:13; 9:14 (Just., A I, 28, 3; Tat. 7, 1; Ath. 31, 2 al.); πρὸς τὸν θ. J 1:2; Ac 24:16; AcPl Ha 3, 8 (Just., D. 39, 1 al.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13 al.); τὰ πρὸς τὸν θ. Hb 2:17; 5:1; Ro 15:17 is acc. of respect: with respect to one’s relation to God or the things pert. to God, in God’s cause (s. B-D-F §160; Rob. 486. For τὰ πρὸς τ. θ. s. Soph., Phil. 1441; X., De Rep. Lac. 13, 11; Aristot., Pol. 1314b, 39; Lucian, Pro Imag. 8; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 109, 3 [III B.C.] εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς θεούς; Ex 4:16; 18:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 236 εὐσεβὴς τὰ πρὸς τ. θεόν). τὰ πρὸς τ[ὸν] θεὸν ἐτήρουσαν, when they were observant of matters pert. to God AcPl Ha 8, 13 (=τα π̣ρος θ̣̄ν̄| ἐτήρουσαν Ox 1602, 10f=BMM recto 16 restored after the preceding).
    without the art. Mt 6:24; Lk 2:14; 20:38; J 1:18a; Ro 8:8, 33b; 2 Cor 1:21; 5:19; Gal 2:19; 4:8f; 2 Th 1:8; Tit 1:16; 3:8; Hb 3:4; AcPl Ha 8, 20=BMM recto 25 (s. also HSanders’ rev. of Ox 1602, 26, in HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2, Ghent 62 verso, 6); AcPlCor 1:15; 2:19, 26. W. prep. ἀπὸ θεοῦ J 3:2a; 16:30 (Just., A II, 13, 4 τὸν … ἀπὸ ἀγεννήτου … θεοῦ λόγον). εἰς θεόν IPhld 1:2. ἐκ θεοῦ (Pind., O. 11, 10, P. 1, 41; Jos., Ant. 2, 164; Just., A I, 22, 2; Mel., P. 55, 404) Ac 5:39; 2 Cor 5:1; Phil 3:9. ἐν θεῷ J 8:21; Ro 2:17; Jd 1; AcPl Ha 1, 15; 2, 35. ἐπὶ θεόν AcPl Ha 2, 29 (cp. πρὸς θεόν Just., D. 138, 2). κατὰ θεόν acc. to God’s will (Appian, Iber. 19 §73; 23 §88; 26 §101, Liby. 6 §25, Bell. Civ. 4, 86 §364) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9ff; IEph 2:1. ἡ κατὰ θ. ἀγάπη godly love IMg 1:1; cp. 13:1; ITr 1:2. παρὰ θεῷ (Jos., Bell. 1, 635) Mt 19:26; Lk 2:52.
    w. gen. foll. or w. ἴδιος to denote a special relationship: ὁ θ. Ἀβραάμ Mt 22:32; Mk 12:26; Lk 20:37; Ac 3:13; 7:32 (all Ex 3:6). ὁ θ. (τοῦ) Ἰσραήλ (Ezk 44:2; JosAs 7:5) Mt 15:31; Lk 1:68; cp. Ac 13:17; 2 Cor 6:16; Hb 11:16. ὁ θ. μου Ro 1:8; 1 Cor 1:4; 2 Cor 12:21; Phil 1:3; 4:19; Phlm 4. OT κύριος ὁ θ. σου (ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν, αὐτῶν) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Lk 1:16; 4:8 (Dt 6:13); 10:27 (Dt 6:5); Ac 2:39. ὁ κύριος καὶ ὁ θ. ἡμῶν Rv 4:11 (Just., D. 12, 3; the combination of κύριος and θεός is freq. in the OT: 2 Km 7:28; 3 Km 18:39; Jer 38:18; Zech 13:9; Ps 29:3; 34:23; 85:15; 87:2; TestAbr A 3 p. 79, 19 [Stone p. 6]; JosAs 3:4; 12:2 κύριε ὁ θ. τῶν αἰώνων. But s. also Epict. 2, 16, 13 κύριε ὁ θεός [GBreithaupt, Her. 62, 1927, 253–55], Herm. Wr.: Cat. Cod. Astr. VIII/2, p. 172, 6 κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, the PGM ref. at the beg. of this entry, and the sacral uses τ. θεῷ κ. κυρίῳ Σοκνοπαίῳ [OGI 655, 3f—24 B.C.]; PTebt 284, 6; τῷ κυρίῳ θεῷ Ἀσκληπίῳ [Sb 159, 2]; deo domino Saturno [ins fr. imperial times fr. Thala in the prov. of Africa: BPhW 21, 1901, 475], also Suetonius, Domit. 13 dominus et deus noster [for the formulation s. 4a: PMich 209]; Ar. 15, 10; Just., D. 60, 3 al.) τὸν ἴδιον θ. AcPl Ha 3, 22.—ὁ θ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χ. Eph 1:17.
    used w. πατήρ (s. πατήρ 6a) ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ Ro 15:6; 2 Cor 1:3; Eph 1:3; Col 1:3; 1 Pt 1:3. ὁ θ. καὶ πατὴρ ἡμῶν Gal 1:4; Phil 4:20; 1 Th 1:3; 3:11, 13. ὁ θ. καὶ πατήρ 1 Cor 15:24; Eph 5:20; Js 1:27. θ. πατήρ Phil 2:11; 1 Pt 1:2; cp. 1 Cor 8:6. ἀπὸ θεοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ro 1:7b; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; Phlm 3; ἀπὸ θ. π. Gal 1:3 v.l.; Eph 6:23; 2 Th 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; παρὰ θεοῦ π. 2 Pt 1:17; 2J 3.
    w. gen. of what God brings about, in accordance w. the divine nature: ὁ θ. τῆς εἰρήνης Ro 15:33; 1 Th 5:23. τῆς ἐλπίδος the God fr. whom hope comes Ro 15:13. πάσης παρακλήσεως 2 Cor 1:3b. ὁ θ. τῆς ἀγάπης 13:11. ὁ θ. πάσης χάριτος 1 Pt 5:10. In οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἀκαταστασίας ὁ θεός 1 Cor 14:33, θεός is to be supplied before ἀκατ.: for God is not a God of disorder.
    The gen. (τοῦ) θεοῦ is
    α. subj. gen., extremely freq. depending on words like βασιλεία, δόξα, θέλημα, ἐντολή, εὐαγγέλιον, λόγος, ναός, οἶκος, πνεῦμα, υἱός, υἱοί, τέκνα and many others. Here prob. (s. β) belongs τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. the (seeming) foolishness of G. 1 Cor 1:25 (s. B-D-F §263, 2).
    β. obj. gen. ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ θ. love for God Lk 11:42; J 5:42; ἡ προσευχὴ τοῦ θ. prayer to God Lk 6:12. πίστις θεοῦ faith in God Mk 11:22. φόβος θεοῦ fear of, reverence for God Ro 3:18 al. (s. φόβος 2bα) If 1 Cor 1:25 is to be placed here (s. α above), τὸ μωρὸν τ. θ. refers to apostolic allegiance to God, which is viewed by outsiders as folly.
    γ. τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ the things, ways, thoughts, or secret purposes of God 1 Cor 2:11. φρονεῖν τὰ τ. θ. Mt 16:23; Mk 8:33 s. φρονέω 2b (ἀτιμάζοντας τὰ τοῦ θ. Just., D. 78, 10 al.). ἀποδιδόναι τὰ τ. θ. τῷ θεῷ give God what belongs to God Mt 22:21; Mk 12:17; Lk 20:25.
    δ. Almost as a substitute for the adj. divine IMg 6:1f; 15 (cp. Ath. 21, 4 οὐδὲν ἔχων θεοῦ [of Zeus]).
    The dat. τῷ θεῷ (s. B-D-F §188, 2; 192; Rob. 538f; WHavers, Untersuchungen z. Kasussyntax d. indogerm. Sprachen 1911, 162ff) is
    α. dat. of advantage (cp. e.g. Ath. 26, 3 ὡς ἐπηκόῳ θεῷ) for God 2 Cor 5:13. Perh. (s. β) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τῷ θ. 10:4. The dat. of Ro 6:10f rather expresses the possessor.
    β. ethical dat. in the sight of God, hence w. superl. force (s. Beginn. IV, 75, on Ac 7:20) very: μεγάλοι τῷ θ. B 8:4 (cp. Jon 3:3). ἀστεῖος τῷ θ. Ac 7:20. Perh. (s. α) ὅπλα δυνατὰ τ. θ. weapons powerful in the sight of God 2 Cor 10:4. This idea is usu. expressed by ἐνώπιον τοῦ θ.
    ὁ θ. is used as a vocative Mk 15:34 (Ps 21:2. θεός twice at the beginning of the invocation of a prayer: Ael. Dion. θ, 8; Paus. Attic. θ, 7 ‘θεὸς θεός’ ταῖς ἀρχαῖς ἐπέλεγον ἐπιφημιζόμενοι); Lk 18:11; Hb 1:8 (Ps 44:7; MHarris, TynBull 36, ’85, 129–62); 10:7 (Ps 39:9); AcPl Ha 3, 10; 5, 12; 31. S. also 2 and 3c and the beg. of this entry.
    θ. τῶν αἰώνων s. αἰών 3 and 4; θ. αἰώνιος s. αἰώνιος 2; θ. ἀληθινός s. ἀληθινός 3b; εἷς ὁ θεός s. εἷς 2b; (ὁ) θ. (ὁ) ζῶν s. [ζάω] 1aε.—ὁ μόνος θεός the only God (4 Km 19:15, 19; Ps 85:10; Is 37:20; Da 3:45; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 1f; s. Norden, Agn. Th. 145) J 5:44 (some mss. lack τοῦ μόνου); 1 Ti 1:17.—ὁ μόνος ἀληθινὸς θ. (Demochares: 75 Fgm. 2 p. 135, 7 Jac. [in Athen. 6, 62, 253c] μόνος θ. ἀληθινός) J 17:3. cp. the sim. combinations w. μόνος θ. Ro 16:27; Jd 25. μόνος ὁ θεὸς μένει AcPl Ha 2, 27.—θ. σωτήρ s. σωτήρ 1.—OHoltzmann, D. chr. Gottesglaube, s. Vorgesch. u. Urgesch.1905; EvDobschütz, Rationales u. irrat. Denken über Gott im Urchristent.: StKr 95, 1924, 235–55; RHoffmann, D. Gottesbild Jesu ’34; PAlthaus, D. Bild Gottes b. Pls: ThBl 20, ’41, 81–92; Dodd 3–8; KRahner, Theos im NT: Bijdragen (Maastricht) 11, ’50, 212–36; 12, ’51, 24–52.
    that which is nontranscendent but considered worthy of special reverence or respect, god (Artem. 2, 69 p. 161, 17: γονεῖς and διδάσκαλοι are like gods; Simplicius in Epict. p. 85, 27 acc. to ancient Roman custom children had to call their parents θεοί; s. 2 above and note on σέβομαι).
    of humans θεοί (as אֱלֹהִים) J 10:34f (Ps 81:6; humans are called θ. in the OT also Ex 7:1; 22:27; cp. Philo, Det. Pot. Insid. 161f, Somn. 1, 229, Mut. Nom. 128, Omn. Prob. Lib. 43, Mos. 1, 158, Decal. 120, Leg. All. 1, 40, Migr. Abr. 84). θ. γίνεται τῶν λαμβανόντων (a benefactor) proves to be a god to recipients Dg 10:6 (cp. Pliny, NH 2, 7, 18; s. 2 above, beg.—Aristot., Pol. 3, 8, 1, 1284a of the superior pers. as a god among humans; Arcesilaus [III B.C.] describes Crates and Polemo as θεοί τινες=‘a kind of gods’ [Diog. L. 4, 22]; Antiphanes says of the iambic poet Philoxenus: θεὸς ἐν ἀνθρώποισιν ἦν [Athen. 14, 50, 643d]; Diod S 1, 4, 7 and 5, 21, 2 of Caesar; for honors accorded Demetrius, s. IKertész, Bemerkungen zum Kult des Demetrios Poliorketes: Oikumene 2, ’78, 163–75 [lit.]; Dio Chrys. 30 [47], 5 Πυθαγόρας ἐτιμᾶτο ὡς θεός; Heliod. 4, 7, 8 σωτὴρ κ. θεός, addressed to a physician; BGU 1197, 1 [4 B.C.] a high official, and 1201, 1 [2 B.C.] a priest θεός and κύριος; PMich 209, 11f [II/III A.D.] οἶδας ἄδελφε, ὅτει οὐ μόνον ὧς ἀδελφόν σε ἔχω, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὡς πατέρα κ. κύριον κ. θεόν; Just., A I, 26, 2 [Σίμων] θεὸς ἐνομίσθη καὶ … ὡς θεὸς τετίμηται; Tat. 3, 2 μὴ θεὸς ὤν [Empedocles]; Ath. 30, 2 Ἀντίνους … ἔτυχε νομίζεσθαι θεός of benefactors in gener. AcJ 27 [Aa II/1, 166, 4]).—JEmerton, JTS 11, ’60, 329–32.
    of the belly (=appetite) as the god of certain people Phil 3:19 (cp. Athen. 3, 97c γάστρων καὶ κοιλιοδαίμων. Also Eupolis Com. [V B.C.] Fgm. 172 K. [in Athen. 3, 100b]; on the use of θ. in ref. to impersonal entities [e.g. Eur., Cyclops 316 of wealth as a god] s. DDD 693f).
    of the devil ὁ θ. τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 2 Cor 4:4 (s. αἰών 2a and WMüllensiefen, StKr 95, 1924, 295–99).—668–99. RAC XI 1202–78; XII 81–154; B. 1464. LfgrE s.v. θεός col. 1001 (lit.). Schmidt, Syn. IV 1–21. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > θεός

  • 9 ἀλλά

    ἀλλά (Hom.+; DELG s.v. ἄλλος; Schwyzer II 578) gener. adversative particle (orig. neut. pl. of ἄλλος, ‘otherwise’) indicating a difference with or contrast to what precedes, in the case of individual clauses as well as whole sentences
    after a negative or after μέν on the contrary, but, yet, rather
    introducing a contrast οὐκ ἦλθον καταλῦσαι, ἀλλὰ πληρῶσαι Mt 5:17. οὐ πᾶς ὁ λέγων … ἀλλʼ ὁ ποιῶν 7:21. οὐκ ἀπέθανεν, ἀλλὰ καθεύδει Mk 5:39. οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον, ἀλλὰ τὸν Ἰησοῦν μόνον 9:8 (v.l. εἰ μὴ τ. Ἰ.). οὐ … σαρκὶ ἀλλὰ μόνῳ πνεύματι AcPl Ant 13 (μόνον Aa I 237, 3). οὐκ ἔστι θεὸς νεκρῶν ἀλλὰ ζώντων Mt 22:32; Mk 12:27; Lk 20:38. ἀλλὰ καθῶς γέγραπται Ro 15:21 introduces a statement about a procedure that contrasts with what precedes.—W. ascensive force (B-D-F §448; Rob. 1187) οὐ μόνον … ἀλλὰ καί not only …, but also (EpArist oft.; TestJob 47:2f; Jos., Bell. 3, 102; Just., A I, 5, 4): οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀποθανεῖν Ac 21:13. οὐ μόνον σὲ ἀλλὰ καὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 26:29; cp. 27:10; Ro 1:32; 4:12, 16; 9:24; 13:5; 2 Cor 8:10, 21; 9:12; Eph 1:21; Phil 1:29; 1 Th 1:5; 2:8; Hb 12:26; 1 Pt 2:18. W. the first member shortened (cp. TestJob 35:1) οὐ μόνον δέ, ἀλλὰ καί not only this (is the case), but also: οὐ μόνον δέ (sc. καυχώμεθα ἐπὶ τούτῳ), ἀλλὰ καὶ καυχώμεθα ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν Ro 5:3, cp. vs. 11; 8:23; 9:10; 2 Cor 8:19.—Introducing the main point after a question expressed or implied, which has been answered in the negative οὐχί, ἀλλὰ κληθήσεται Ἰωάννης no; rather his name shall be John Lk 1:60. οὐχί, λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἐὰν μὴ μετανοῆτε no! I tell you; rather, if you do not repent 13:3, 5; cp. 16:30; J 7:12; Ac 16:37; Ro 3:27 (TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 5; 31f [Stone p. 12]; JosAs 4:15 al.; ApcMos 6) after μὴ γένοιτο, which serves as a strong negation 3:31; 7:7, 13; cp. 1 Cor 7:21. The neg. answer is omitted as obvious: (no,) instead of that 6:6 (as a declaration). Instead of ἀ.: ἀλλʼ ἤ Lk 12:51; B 2:8. Also after a negative and ἄλλος, as in Pla., X. et al. (Kühner-G. II 284f; IG IV, 951, 76 [320 B.C.]; PPetr II, 46a, 5 [200 B.C.]; Just., A II, 4, 2 al.; in rhetorical quest. PsSol 5:12; B-D-F §448, 8): except οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν ἀλλʼ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε for we write you nothing (else) except what you can understand 2 Cor 1:13. This construction οὐκ ἄλλος ἀλλʼ ἤ is a combination of οὐκ ἄλλος …, ἀλλά (PTebt 104, 19 [92 B.C.] μὴ ἐξέστω Φιλίσκωνι γυναῖκα ἄλλην ἐπαγαγέσθαι, ἀλλὰ Ἀπολλωνίαν) 1 Cl 51:5, and οὐκ ἄλλος ἤ … (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 20).
    within the same clause, used to contrast single words (Just., A I, 15, 7 οὐ τούς δικαίους … ἀλλὰ τούς ἀσεβεῖς, D. 48, 1): οὐ … δικαίους ἀλλʼ ἁμαρτωλούς Mt 9:13; Lk 5:32. οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχεται ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με Mk 9:37. ἀλλʼ οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω ἀλλὰ τί σύ 14:36, cp. J 5:30; 6:38. ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχὴ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὴ ἀλλὰ τοῦ πέμψαντός με 7:16. οὐκ ἐγὼ ἀλλὰ ὁ κύριος 1 Cor 7:10. οὐ τῇ πορνείᾳ, ἀλλὰ τῷ κυρίῳ 6:13. οὐκ εἰς τὸ κρεῖσσον ἀλλὰ εἰς τὸ ἧσσον 11:17. οὐκ ἔστιν ἓν μέλος ἀλλὰ πολλά 12:14. οὐκ εἰς τὸ ἀγαθὸν ἀλλʼ εἰς τὸ πονηρόν D 5:2. οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος ἀλλʼ ὡς εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν B 1:8 al. In Mt 20:23, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν τοῦτο δοῦναι, ἀλλʼ οἷς ἡτοίμασται ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου has been shortened from οὐκ ἐμὸν … ἀλλὰ τοῦ πατρός, ὅς δώσει οἷς ἡτοίμασται ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.—But s. WBeck, CTM 21, ’50, 606–10 for the mng. except for Mt 20:23=Mk 10:40, and Mk 4:22, also 9:8 v.l. (for εἰ μή); D 9:5. So also B-D-F §448, 8; Mlt-Turner 330; MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113f.—After μὲν, to indicate that a limiting phrase is to follow πάντα μὲν καθαρά, ἀλλὰ κακὸν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ Ro 14:20. σὺ μὲν γὰρ καλῶς εὐχαριστεῖς, ἀλλʼ ὁ ἕτερος οὐκ οἰκοδομεῖται 1 Cor 14:17.—The use of ἀλλά in the Johannine lit. is noteworthy, in that the parts contrasted are not always of equal standing grammatically: οὐκ ἦν ἐκεῖνος τὸ φῶς ἀλλʼ ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ τοῦ φωτός=ἀλλὰ μαρτυρῶν π. τ. φ. J 1:8; οὐκ ᾔδειν αὐτόν ἀλλʼ … ἦλθον although I did not know him, yet I came vs. 31. εἶπον [ὅτι] οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, ἀλλʼ ὅτι I said, ‘I am not the Christ; rather, I was sent before him’ 3:28. οὔτε οὗτος ἥμαρτεν οὔτε οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἀλλʼ ἵνα φανερωθῇ neither this man has sinned, nor his parents, but (he was born blind) that … might be revealed 9:3.
    when whole clauses are compared, ἀλλά can indicate a transition to someth. different or contrasted: the other side of a matter or issue, but, yet. δεῖ γὰρ γενέσθαι, ἀλλʼ οὔπω ἐστὶν τὸ τέλος Mt 24:6, cp. Lk 21:9. κεκοίμηται• ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν J 11:11, cp. vs. 15; 16:20; Lk 22:36; J 4:23; 6:36, 64; 8:37; Ac 9:6; Ro 10:18f. ἁμαρτία οὐκ ἐλλογεῖται … ἀλλὰ … sin is not charged; nevertheless … 5:13f. Introducing an objection, ἀλλὰ ἐρεῖ τις (Jos., Bell. 7, 363 and Just., A I, 7, 1 ἀλλὰ φήσει τις) probably colloq. = ‘well’, someone will say: 1 Cor 15:35; Js 2:18 (difft. DWatson, NTS 39 ’93, 94–121). Taking back or limiting a preceding statement παρένεγκε τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο ἀπʼ ἐμοῦ• ἀλλʼ οὐ τί ἐγὼ θέλω Mk 14:36. ἀλλʼ οὐχ ὡς τὸ παράπτωμα, οὔτως καὶ τὸ χάρισμα Ro 5:15. ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἐχρησάμεθα τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ ταύτῃ 1 Cor 9:12. ἀλλὰ ἕκαστος ἴδιον ἔχει χάρισμα 7:7. ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τούτου δὲ εἴρηται D 1:6.—In ἀλλʼ, οὐ πάντες οἱ ἐξελθόντες … ; in Hb 3:16 ἀλλʼ, in the opinion of some, seems to owe its origin solely to a misunderstanding of the preceding τίνες as τινές by an early copyist (B-D-F §448, 4), but here ἀλλά may convey strong asseveration surely (so REB). See 3 below.
    before independent clauses, to indicate that the preceding is to be regarded as a settled matter, thus forming a transition to someth. new (Just., A I, 3; 10, 1) other matter for additional consideration, but ἀλλὰ ὁ ὄχλος οὗτος … ἐπάρατοί εἰσιν but this rabble … is accursed J 7:49. ἀλλʼ ἐν τούτοις πᾶσιν ὑπερνικῶμεν (no, not at all!) but in all these we are more than conquerors Ro 8:37. ἀλλʼ ὅτι ἃ θύουσιν, δαιμονίοις … θύουσιν (no!) but they (the gentiles) offer what they sacrifice to inferior deities 1 Cor 10:20 (their second-rate status is Paul’s connotation). Cp. Gal 2:3 and Mt 11:7f ἀλλὰ τί ἐξήλθατε ἰδεῖν; (you could not have wanted to see that;) but what did you go out to see? Also to be explained elliptically is the ascensive ἀλλὰ καί (and not only this,) but also Lk 12:7; 16:21; 24:22; Phil 1:18 (Ath. 21, 4); negative ἀλλʼ οὐδέ Lk 23:15; Ac 19:2; 1 Cor 3:2; 4:3 (Ar. 9:1); strengthened ἀλλά γε καί indeed Lk 24:21; ἀλλὰ μὲν οὖν γε καί Phil 3:8; Hb 3:16 (s. 2 above) may well be rendered (as NEB) all those, surely, whom Moses had led out of Egypt (cp. Dio Chrys. 33, 36; 47, 3).
    for strong alternative/additional consideration
    in the apodosis of conditional sentences, yet, certainly, at least εἰ καὶ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται, ἀλλʼ οὐκ ἐγώ certainly I will not Mk 14:29; cp. 1 Cor 8:6; 2 Cor 4:16; 5:16; 11:6; strengthened ἀλλὰ καί: εἰ γὰρ σύμφυτοι γεγόναμεν …, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως (sc. σύμφυτοι) ἐσόμεθα we shall certainly be united w. him in his resurrection Ro 6:5; limited by γε (ἀλλʼ οὖν γε Just., D. 76, 6; 93, 1): εἰ ἄλλοις οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος, ἀλλά γε ὑμῖν εἰμι at least I am one to you 1 Cor 9:2 (cp. X., Cyr. 1, 3, 6; B-D-F §439, 2). ἐὰν γὰρ μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ, ἀλλʼ οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας certainly not many fathers 1 Cor 4:15.
    rhetorically ascensive: (not only this,) but rather πόσην κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν σπουδήν, ἀ. ἀπολογίαν, ἀ. ἀγανάκτησιν, ἀ. φόβον, ἀ. ἐπιπόθησιν, ἀ. ζῆλον, ἀ. ἐκδίκησιν even, yes indeed 2 Cor 7:11. On Eph 5:24 s. 5 below.
    w. an impv. to strengthen the command: now, then (Arrian, Anab. 5, 26, 4 ἀλλὰ παραμείνατε=so hold on! JosAs 13:9; ApcMos 3; SibOr 3, 624; 632; Jos., Ant. 4, 145): ἀλλὰ ἐλθὼν ἐπίθες τὴν χεῖρά σου now come and lay your hand on her Mt 9:18. ἀλλʼ εἴ τι δύνῃ, βοήθησον now help me, if you can (in any way) Mk 9:22. ἀλλὰ ὑπάγετε εἴπατε now go and tell 16:7. ἀλλὰ ἀναστὰς κατάβηθι Ac 10:20. ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι 26:16 (JosAs 14:11).—In same sense w. subjunctive ἀλλʼ … ἀπειλησώμεθα αὐτοῖς μηκέτι λαλεῖν now let us warn them not to speak any longer 4:17. ἀλλʼ ὥσπερ ἐν παντὶ περισσεύετε … ἵνα καὶ ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι περισσεύητε 2 Cor 8:7. Unless Eph 5:24 is to be placed in 4b, it is prob. to be understood as an ellipsis, and can be expanded thus: then just as the church is subject to Christ, wives should also be subject to their husbands. Yet ἀλλά is also used to introduce an inference from what precedes: so, therefore, accordingly (e.g. Aristoph., Ach. 1189 ὁδὶ δὲ καὐτός. Ἀλλʼ ἄνοιγε τὴν θύραν=‘here he is in person. So open the door’, Birds 1718; Herodas 7, 89; Artem. 4, 27 p. 219, 22; cp. AMoorehouse, ClQ 46, ’52, 100–104 on ‘progressive’ ἀλλά as Od. 3, 388).—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀλλά

  • 10 ὀνίνημι

    ὀνίνημι [pron. full] [ῐ]
    A

    , ὀνίνης Pl.Hp.Ma. 301c

    ,

    ὀνίνησι Il.24.45

    , Hes.Th. 429, etc. ; inf. ὀνινάναι dub. in Pl.R. 600d ; part. ὀνινάς, ᾶσα Id.Phlb. 58c ([tense] impf. supplied by ὠφέλουν): [tense] fut.

    ὀνήσω Il.8.36

    , Orac. ap. Hdt.7.141, E.Andr. 1004, etc. ; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3sg.

    ὀνασεῖ Theoc.7.36

    : [tense] aor.

    ὤνησα Il.9.509

    , Hdt.9.76, E.Tr. 933, Pl.Ap. 27c ; [dialect] Ep.

    ὄνησα Il.1.503

    :—[voice] Med.,

    ὀνίνᾰμαι Pl.Grg. 525c

    : [tense] impf.

    ὠνινάμην Id.R. 380b

    : [tense] fut.

    ὀνήσομαι Il.7.173

    , S.Tr. 570, E.Hel. 935, Pl.Ap. 30c : [tense] aor. I ὠνησάμην only in Gal. 2.381 (unless in AP7.484 (Diosc.) we accept ὠνάσατο [with ᾰ] for the meaningless ὠνόσατο) ; ὀνήσω (2 pers. sg.) in Porph.Marc. 10 is f.l. either for ὠνήσω or for ὤνησο : [tense] aor. 2

    ὠνήμην Thgn.1380

    , E.Alc. 335, Pl.Men. 84c ; imper.

    ὄνησο Od.19.68

    ; part.

    ὀνήμενος 2.33

    (cf. [pref] ἀπ-) ; also

    ὠνάμην, ὤνασθε E.HF 1368

    ,

    ὤναο Call.Aet.3.1.6

    , and freq. later, Luc.D Mort.12.2, etc. ;

    ὤνατο IG14.1389

    ii 37,

    ὤναντο D.H.1.23

    ; inf.

    ὄνασθαι E.Hipp. 517

    , Pl.R. 528a ; opt. ὀναίμην, which is freq. (v. infr. 11.2), may belong to either form: in Hom. ὠνάμην is the [tense] aor. I of ὄνομαι :—[voice] Pass. [full] ὀνέομαι occurs twice,

    ὀνεῖται Stob.4.22.62

    , ὀνούμενοι Ps.-Luc.Philopatr.26: [tense] aor. inf.

    ὀνηθῆναι X.An.5.5.2

    ; [dialect] Dor.

    ὠνάθην Theoc.15.55

    :
    I [voice] Act., profit, benefit, help, and sts. gratify, delight, abs.,

    βουλὴν.. ὑποθησόμεθ' ἥτις ὀνήσει Il.8.36

    , cf. Hes.Th. 429, E.Med. 533, etc.: with neut. Adj. or Adv.,

    ὀ. παῦρα h.Merc. 577

    ;

    σμικρὰ ὀνήσει πόλιν E.Heracl. 705

    (anap.), cf. Pl.Phlb. 58c ;

    μᾶλλον Simon.55

    , Aret. CA1.4: c.acc. pers., Il.5.205, 7.172, Orac. ap. Hdt.7.141, E.Hipp. 314, Ar.Lys. 1033, etc.: with neut. Adj.,

    ἄνδρας μέγα σίνεται ἠδ' ὀνίνησι Il. 24.45

    , cf. 9.509, v.l. in X.An.3.1.38, etc. ;

    πολλὰ ὀ. τινά Od.14.67

    ;

    τοσόνδε E.Tr. 933

    ;

    εἴ ποτε δή τι Il.1.395

    : c. dat. modi, εἴ ποτε δή σε ὄνησα ἢ ἔπει ἢ ἔργῳ ib. 503 : c. part., Ξενοφῶντα ὠνήσατε οὐχ ἑλόμενοι by not electing him, X.An.6.1.32, cf. Pl.Smp. 193d, Hp.Ma. 301c ;

    ὡς ὤνησας ὅτι ἀπεκρίνω Id.Ap. 27c

    : c. dupl. acc., σὲ δὲ τοῦτό γε γῆρας ὀνήσει this benefit at least will thine old age bestow on thee, Od.23.24 ; also οὐδεμίαν ὤνησε κάλλος εἰς πόσιν ξυνάορον helped her in her relations with.., E.Fr.909.1.
    II [voice] Med., have profit or advantage, enjoy help or support, have enjoyment or delight, Il.6.260, 7.173, Od.14.415, E.Hipp. 517, etc.: c. part., have benefit from being or doing so and so, Thgn.1380, Pl.Ap. 30c, R. 380b, Men. 84c, etc.: but most freq. c. gen., have advantage from.., have delight or enjoyment of..,

    δαιτὸς ὄνησο Od.19.68

    ;

    λέκτρων -ήσομαι E.Med. 1348

    ; πρὶν σφῷν ὄνασθαι ib. 1025, cf. Alc. 335 : freq. with neut. Adj. added, τί σευ ἄλλος ὀνήσεται; what good will others have of thee, i. e. what good will you have done them? Il.16.31 ;

    τοσόνδ' ὀνήσῃ τῶν ἐμῶν.. πορθμῶν S.Tr. 570

    , etc. ; so

    ὄνασθαί τι ἀπό τινος Pl.R. 528a

    ; also

    ὀ. τοῦτο ὅτι.. Luc. DMort.12.2

    : also with an ironical sense, ὄναιο μέντἄν, εἴ τις ἐκπλύνειέ σε you'd be the better of it, if one were to wash you clean, Ar.Pl. 1062 ; ἁλσὶν διασμηχθεὶς ὄναιτ' ἂν οὑτοσί he'd be very nice if he were rubbed down with salt, Id.Nu. 1237 ; so ὠνάθην μεγάλως ὅτι.. lucky for me that.., Theoc.15.55 ;

    ὤνησο, διότι μὴ ὁ Ζεὺς ἐπήκουσέ σου Luc. Prom.20

    .
    2 [tense] aor. opt. ὀναίμην, αιο, αιτο, in protestations, wishes, etc., ὄναιο mayst thou have profit, i. e. bless thee.., E.Or. 1677, etc.: and c. gen., ὄναιο τῶν φρενῶν bless thee for.., Id.IA 1359 ;

    ὄναισθε μύθων Id.IT 1078

    , cf. Hel. 1418 ; οὕτως ὀναίμην τῶν τέκνων so may I have profit of them, in a parenthesis, Ar.Th. 469 ;

    οὕτως ὄναισθε τούτων D.28.20

    ;

    ὄναιντο βίου Simon.128

    ; μή νυν ὀναίμην, ἀλλ'.. ὀλοίμην may I not see good, but die, S.OT 644 ; ὄναιο τοῦ γενναίου χάριν bless thee for thy noble spirit, Id.OC 1042.
    3 [tense] aor. part. ὀνήμενος, of those to whom (or of whom) one says ὄναιο (ὄναιτο), blessed,

    ἐσθλός μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι, ὀνήμενος Od.2.33

    : for this sense of a part. cf. ἐπίτριπτος, οὐλόμενος.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὀνίνημι

  • 11 εἰς

    εἰς prep. w. acc. (Hom.+; s. the lit. under ἀνά, beg., also ATheimer, Die Präp. εἰς, ἐν, ἐκ im NT: Progr. z. 24. u. 29. Jahresbericht des niederösterr. Landes-Real-u. Obergymnasiums Horn 1896; 1901; AOepke, TW II 418–32), indicating motion into a thing or into its immediate vicinity or relation to something.
    extension involving a goal or place, into, in, toward, to
    into, toward, to after verbs of going, or those that include motion toward a place (also after subst. as ἄφιξις Tat. 37, 1 or πορεία 38, 1); so after ἄγω, ἀκολουθέω, ἀναβαίνω, ἀνάγω, ἀναχωρέω, ἀνέρχομαι, ἄπειμι, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποδημέω, ἀποπλέω, γίνομαι δεῦρο, διαβαίνω, διαπεράω, διασῴζω, διέρχομαι, διώκω, εἰσάγω, εἴσειμι, εἰσέρχομαι, εἰσπορεύομαι, ἐκπηδάω, ἐκπλέω, ἐκπορεύομαι, ἐμβαίνω, ἐμβάλλω, ἐνδύνω, ἐξέρχομαι, ἐπανάγω, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιστρέφω, ἔρχομαι (s. Goodsp., Probs. 56f), εὐθυδρομέω, ἥκω, καθίζω, καταβαίνω (s. Goodsp., Probs. 52–54), κατάγομαι, καταντάω, καταπλέω, καταφεύγω, κατέρχομαι, μεταβαίνω, ὁρμάω, παραβάλλω, παραγίνομαι, πέτομαι, πλέω, πορείαν ποιοῦμαι, πορεύομαι, προάγω, συμβάλλω, συνάγομαι, συναναβαίνω, συνέρχομαι, ὑπάγω, ὑποστρέφω, ὑποχωρέω, φεύγω, χωρέω; s. these entries.
    α. extension toward, in the direction of, a specific place to be reached. Hence w. nouns that denote an accessible place εἰς τὸν οἶκον into the house Mt 9:7; synagogue Ac 17:10; heaven Lk 2:15; abyss 8:31. φεύγειν εἰς τὰ ὄρη Mk 13:14. W. names of places and countries to Spain Ro 15:24, 28. εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ vs. 25 al. Also on, in εἰς (τὰς) ὁδούς Lk 14:23; Mt 10:5, 10; εἰς ὁδόν Mk 6:8; 10:17. εἰς ἀγρόν 16:12. In another sense ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος 3:13; Mt 15:29.In the vicinity of, near, to (Jos., Vi. 115 εἰς τ. κώμην) εἰς (τὴν) θάλασσαν Mk 7:31; 3:7 v.l.; Mt 17:27. εἰς πόλιν (Hdt. 2, 169; 4, 200, 1; Diod S 15, 32, 2 παραγενόμενος εἰς πόλιν) J 4:5; cp. vs. 28. εἰς τό μνημεῖον 11:31, 38; 20:1, 3f (cp. vs. 6). ἐγγίζειν εἰς (Tob 11:1) Mt 21:1; Mk 11:1; Lk 18:35; 19:29. εἰς τοὺς φραγμούς to the hedges 14:23. κλίνειν τὸ πρόσωπον εἰς τ. γῆν toward the ground 24:5.
    β. with focus on the area within the point reached. After verbs of sending, moving, etc., which result in movement or include a movement of the body to, into, among εἰς τὴν πόλιν into the city Mt 26:18 al.; boat Mt 8:23; J 6:17; world J 1:9; εἰς τ. ναόν 2 Th 2:4; εἰς (τὸ) μέσον (Sir 27:12; cp. 48:17): ἔστη εἰς τὸ μέσον (X., Cyr. 4, 1, 1), he (came and) stood among them J 20:19, 26; cp. Mk 14:60; Lk 6:8, also ἔγειρε εἰς τὸ μ. get up and come here Mk 3:3.—δέχεσθαι εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας take in (into) one’s arms Lk 2:28 (cp. Jos., Ant. 8, 28).
    γ. of movement directed at a surface of an area on, in: of striking (PRyl 145, 13f [38 A.D.] ἔδωκεν πληγὰς πλείους εἰς πᾶν μέρος τοῦ σώματος=gave many blows all over his body; cp. PTebt 39, 32) τύπτειν εἰς τ. κεφαλήν on the head Mt 27:30 (cp. Arrian, Anab. 2, 26, 4 ἐμβάλλειν εἰς τ. κεφαλήν). ῥαπίζειν εἰς τὴν σιαγόνα on the cheek 5:39.—εἰς τ. ὄμματα Mk 8:23; εἰς τ. ὁδόν 11:8; ἀναπίπτειν εἰς τ. ἔσχατον τόπον sit in the lowest place Lk 14:10; cp. vs. 8. εἰς τὴν χεῖρα, τοὺς πόδας on his hand, his feet Lk 15:22.
    δ. of a position within a certain area be at, be in, be on εἰς is freq. used where ἐν would be expected (s. 1bβ below; for Mark usage s. JO’Rourke, JBL 85, ’66, 349–51)—(Hdt. 7, 239, 1; Diod S 13, 101, 3; 20, 30, 2; Vett. Val. index III p. 394b; PTebt 38, 14 [113 B.C.] εἰς ὸ̔ν ἐνοικεῖ … οἶκον; POxy 294, 6 [22 A.D.]; 929, 12; BGU 385, 5; 423, 7; Kaibel 134; LXX. Cp. GHatzidakis, Einl. in die neugr. Gramm. 1892, 210f; Mlt. 62f, 234f; Rob. 592f; Rdm.2 14; 140; B-D-F §205; EOldenburger, De Or. Sib. Elocutione, diss. Rostock 1903, 26ff) εἰς τ. κοίτην εἶναι Lk 11:7. εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Mk 10:10. οἱ εἰς τ. οἶκόν μου (ὄντες) Lk 9:61. οἱ εἰς μακρὰν (ὄντες) Ac 2:39. καθημένου εἰς τὸ ὄρος Mk 13:3 (cp. Musonius 43, 18 H. καθῆσθαι εἰς Σινώπην). ὁ εἰς τὸν ἀγρὸν (ὤν) he who is in the field 13:16. γίνεσθαι εἰς τὴν Καφαρναούμ happen in Capernaum Lk 4:23. εἰς συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσθε you will be beaten in the synagogues Mk 13:9. εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον he found himself in A. Ac 8:40 (cp. Esth 1:5 τοῖς ἔθνεσιν τοῖς εὑρεθεῖσιν εἰς τ. πόλιν; Gen 37:17). ἀποθανεῖν εἰς Ἰερ. Ac 21:13 (cp. Aelian, VH 7, 8 Ἡφαιστίων εἰς Ἐκβάτανα ἀπέθανε). κατοικεῖν εἰς Ἰερ. Ac 2:5; cp. Mt 2:23; 4:13; Ac 7:4; Hb 11:9 (cp. Thu. 2, 102, 6; X., An. 1, 2, 24; Num 35:33; 2 Ch 19:4). χάριν, εἰς ἣν στῆτε the favor in which you stand 1 Pt 5:12. ἔχειν βιβλίον εἰς τὰς χεῖρας have a book in one’s hands Hv 1, 2, 2. πηλὸς γάρ ἐσμεν εἰς την χεῖρα τοῦ τεχνίτου for we are clay in the hand of the artisan. εἰς ταύτην τὴν πόλιν in this city 2, 4, 3 al.—εἰς=at or on (BGU 845, 20f; τραπέζας … εἰς ἃς ἤσθιον οἱ πτωχοί TestJob 25:5) ὁ ὢν εἰς τ. κόλπον τ. πατρός who leans on the breast (or reclines in the lap) of the Father (=who is on intimate terms w. the Father, s. κόλπος) J 1:18. In AcPlCor 2:35 the prepositions εἰς and ἐν appear to be carefully distinguished: τὰ δεσμὰ εἰς τὰς χείρας ἔχω … καὶ τὰ στίγματα ἐν τῷ σώματί μου.
    ε. of presence in an area determined by other objects, esp. after verbs of sending, moving, etc. including ἀπολύω, ἀποστέλλω, βάλλω, βαπτίζω, δέχομαι, δίδωμι, ἐγκεντρίζω, ἐκβάλλω, ἐκπέμπω, ἐκχέω, ἐμβάπτω, ἐξαποστέλλω, καθίημι, μεταπέμπομαι, παρακύπτω, πέμπω, χαλάω; s. these entries. ἐμπίπτειν εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς fall among robbers Lk 10:36. εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας among the thorns Mk 4:7; εἰς τ. λαόν Ac 4:17 et al., where the transl. depends on the verb in question. πνεύματος ἁγίου … ἀποσταλέντος εἰς αὐτήν (Μαρίαν) sent into her AcPlCor 2:5; cp. 2:10 ἔπεμψεν εἰς τοὺς προφήτας into the prophets; 2:14 κατέπεμψε … εἰς Μαρίαν.—ἔστη εἰς τὸ κριτήριον she stood before the tribunal GJs 15:2 (difft. J 20:19, 26, s. 1aβ).
    of direction toward something without ref. to bodily motion.
    α. w. verbs of looking (fr. Od. 10, 37; Il. 3, 364; LXX) ἀναβλέπειν εἴς τι look up toward someth. (2 Macc 7:28; Sus 35 Theod.) Mk 6:41; Lk 9:16; Ac 22:13; cp. ἀτενίζω, βλέπω, ἐμβλέπω, ὁράω (Just., D. 112, 1).—ἐπαίρειν τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς εἴς τινα raise one’s eyes toward someone Lk 6:20.
    β. after verbs of saying, teaching, proclaiming, preaching, etc. (Trag.; Hdt. 8:26, 3; Thu. 1, 72, 2; 5, 45, 1 and many later wr., incl. LXX) λαλεῖν εἰς τ. κόσμον say to the world J 8:26. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον εἰς ὅλον τ. κόσμον the gospel in the whole world Mk 14:9. εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 13:10; Lk 24:47. εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Th 2:9. εὐαγγελίζεσθαι εἴς τινα 2 Cor 10:16; 1 Pt 1:25; γνωρίζειν Ro 16:26. ἀπαγγέλλειν τι εἴς τινα Mk 5:14; Lk 8:34. διαμαρτύρεσθαι εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ, μαρτυρεῖν εἰς Ῥώμην bear witness in Jerusalem, Rome Ac 23:11. ἵνα εἰς Νινευὴ μὴ κηρύξῃ AcPlCor 2:29. In these and similar cases εἰς approaches ἐν in mng.; s. 1aδ.
    γ. The same is true of βαπτίζεσθαι εἰς τὸν Ἰορδάνην Mk 1:9 and νίπτεσθαι εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν J 9:7; these expr. look like exx. of the interchange of εἰς and ἐν, but were orig. formed on the analogy of X., Cyr. 1, 3, 5 ἀποκαθαίρει τὴν χεῖρα εἰς τὰ χειρόμακτρα= lit. ‘into the towels’; cp. Epict. 3, 22, 71 ἵνʼ αὐτὸ (sc. τὸ παιδίον) λούσῃ εἰς σκάφην; Alciphron, Ep. 3, 7, 1; Athen. 10, 438e.
    extension in time, to, until, on
    w. indication of specific time
    α. up to which someth. continues εἰς τέλος to the end (Epict. 1, 7, 17) Mt 10:22; 24:13; Mk 13:13. εἰς ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν until that day 2 Ti 1:12 (Ath. 2, 1 εἰς … τὴν σήμερον ἡμέραν). εἰς ἡμέραν Χριστοῦ Phil 1:10. εἰς Χριστόν until the coming of the Messiah Gal 3:24.
    β. for or on which someth. happens μεριμνᾶν εἰς τὴν αὔριον be anxious for tomorrow Mt 6:34; cp. Hs 6, 5, 3; εἰς τὸ μέλλον for the future 1 Ti 6:19. εἰς τὸ μεταξὺ σάββατον on the next Sabbath Ac 13:42. εἰς ἡμέραν (UPZ 66, 5 [153 B.C.]) for the day Phil 2:16; cp. Eph 4:30; Rv 9:15.
    γ. at which someth. takes place (Appian, Mithrid. 74 §321 ἐς ἑσπέραν=in the evening; Epict. 4, 10, 31 αὔριον ἢ εἰς τὴν τρίτην; En 1:1 οἵτινες ἔσονται εἰς ἡμέραν ἀνάγκης) εἰς τὸν καιρὸν αὐτῶν in their time Lk 1:20; εἰς τὸ μέλλον in the future 13:9. εἰς τέλος in the end, finally (Hdt. 3, 403; Gen 46:4; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 18, 2) 18:5 (B-D-F §207, 3 prefers mng. 3 below and ὑπωπιάζω 3; s. also Mlt-Turner 266). εἰς τὸ πάλιν=πάλιν 2 Cor 13:2; s. Schmid I 167; II 129; III 282; IV 455; 625. εἰς ταχεῖαν soon AcPlCor 2:3.
    to indicate duration of time for, throughout (Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 16 Jac. εἰς νύκτα; Arrian, Anab. 4, 30, 1 ἐς τρεῖς ἡμέρας; Just., D. 2, 5 εἰς μακρὰν for a long time) εἰς ἔτη πολλά for many years Lk 12:19. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας (αἰών 1b) forever Mt 21:19; Mk 3:29; 11:14; Lk 1:33; J 8:35 and oft. εἰς ἡμέραν αἰῶνος to the day of eternity 2 Pt 3:18. εἰς γενεὰς καὶ γενεάς for generation after generation Lk 1:50. εἰς τὸ διηνεκές forever Hb 7:3; 10:1, 12, 14 (cp. Thu. 2, 64, 3 ἐς ἀί̈διον).
    marker of degree, up to: εἰς τέλος completely, fully, absolutely (s. Just, A I, 44, 12 and on τέλος 2bγ) 1 Th 2:16; B 4:7; 19:11; Hv 3, 7, 2; m 12, 2, 3; Hs 8, 6, 4; 8, 8, 5; 8, 9, 3.—J 13:1 combines in εἰς τέλος the mngs. to the end (s. 2aα above) and to the uttermost (cp. Appian, Mithrid. 58 §239 ἡμῶν ἀμυναμένων ἤδη καὶ ἀμυνουμένων ἐς τέλος=we have defended ourselves up to now and will defend ourselves ἐς τέλος). εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 2 Cor 10:13, 15 (cp. PVat A 12=Witkowski 36, 12 [168 B.C.] εἰς τὰ ἔσχατα). εἰς περισσείαν 10:15. εἰς ὑπερβολήν (Eur., Hipp. 939; Aeschin., F. Leg. 4) 4:17. εἰς τὸ παντελές (q.v. 2) Lk 13:11; Hb 7:25 (Tat. 6, 1).
    marker of goals involving affective/abstract/suitability aspects, into, to
    of entry into a state of being w. verbs of going, coming, leading, etc., used in a fig. sense: ἀπέρχεσθαι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον Mt 25:46 (cp. Sir 41:10). εἰσφέρειν εἰς πειρασμόν 6:13. πορεύεσθαι εἰς θάνατον Lk 22:33. ὑπάγειν εἰς ἀπώλειαν Rv 17:8, 11. βάλλειν εἰς θλῖψιν 2:22. παραδιδόναι εἰς θλῖψιν Mt 24:9; cp. 2 Cor 4:11; Lk 24:20. συγκλείειν εἰς ἀπείθειαν Ro 11:32. ἐμπίπτειν εἰς κρίμα 1 Ti 3:6f; cp. 6:9 (and Ath. 24, 5 εἰς ἐπιθυμίαν πεσόντες παρθένων). ἄγειν εἰς μετάνοιαν Ro 2:4; cp. Hb 2:10 εἰς δόξαν. (Just., A I, 10, 4 εἰς πίστιν; 42, 11 εἰς ἐπίστασιν καὶ ἀνάμνησιν.) αἰχμαλωτίζειν εἰς ὑπακοήν 2 Cor 10:5. ἀνακαινίζειν εἰς μετάνοιαν Hb 6:6; cp. 2:10. Sim. ἀπάγω, ἀποβαίνω, εἰσέρχομαι, εἰσφέρω, ἐκβάλλω, ἐλευθερόω, ἐπιστρέφω, κατευθύνω, μεταβαίνω, ὁδηγέω et al.; s. these entries.
    of change from one state to another w. verbs of changing: στρέφειν (Esth 4:17h; 1 Macc 1:39), μεταστρέφειν (Sir 11:31; 1 Macc 9:41; 3 Macc 6:22) τι εἴς τι Rv 11:6; Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); Js 4:9. μεταλλάσσειν Ro 1:26. μετασχηματίζεσθαι (q.v. 2) 2 Cor 11:13f; μετατίθεσθαι εἰς turn away to Gal 1:6.
    of actions or feelings directed in someone’s direction in hostile or friendly sense (Thu. 1, 38; 66; 130; X., Cyr. 1, 3, 5; Paus. 7, 9, 3; 7, 10, 2; Aelian, VH 11, 10).
    α. in a hostile sense (Arrian, Anab. 1, 1, 4; PEleph 1, 9 [311/310 B.C.] κακοτεχνεῖν εἰς Δημητρίαν; UPZ 170b, 47 [127 B.C.]): ἁμαρτάνειν εἴς τινα (Herodian 7, 9, 11; EpJer 12; Jdth 5:20; 11:10) sin against someone Lk 15:18, 21. βλασφημεῖν εἴς τινα (Bel 8 Theod.; Just., D. 122, 2) defame someone Mk 3:29; Lk 12:10; 22:65; θαρρεῖν εἴς τινα 2 Cor 10:1. ψεύδεσθαι εἴς τινα (Sus 55; 59 Theod.) Col 3:9. Also w. nouns and adj. (Paus. 7, 8, 4; PFay 12, 7 [c. 103 B.C.] ἀδικήματα εἴς με; En 97:7 μνημόσυνον εἰς ὑμᾶς κακόν) Ac 6:11; 23:30; Ro 8:7.
    β. in a friendly sense: μακροθυμεῖν 2 Pt 3:9. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Ro 12:16. So also πιστεύειν εἴς τινα trust or believe in someone Mt 18:6; Mk 9:42 and oft. (s. πιστεύω 1aε). Also w. nouns (OGI 49, 10 [III B.C.] φιλοτιμία εἰς; 51, 4; UPZ 22, 18 [162 B.C.]; 39, 5 εἰς τὸ θεῖον εὐσέβεια; 2 Macc 9:26 εὔνοια; Tat. 16:2 τῆς εἰς αὐτοὺς [δαίμονας] θρησκείας) ἀγάπη Ro 5:8; 2 Cor 2:4, 8; Col 1:4; 1 Th 3:12. ἐλπίς (2 Macc 9:20; Synes., Ep. 104 p. 264a εἰς τὸν κομήτην ἐ.) Ac 24:15. κοινωνία Phil 1:5 (Tat. 18, 2); πεποίθησις 2 Cor 8:22. δύναμις Eph 1:19. πίστις (Jos., Ant. 16, 48; 18, 334) Ac 20:21; 24:24; 26:18; Col 2:5; and adj. φιλόξενος 1 Pt 4:9; χρηστός Eph 4:32. διακονία Ro 15:31 (cp. the v.l. Ac 12:25 and s. JDupont, NovT 1, ’56, 275–303); 2 Cor 8:4. The context of 1 Pt 1:11 suggests consolation of Christians for the sufferings they endure in a hostile environment, hence REB: sufferings in Christ’s cause; for εἰς Χρ. construed genitivally (UPZ 180a II, 2 [113 B.C.] χωρὶς τοῦ εἰς αὐτὴν οἴκου; PTebt 16:9f contains a restoration of εἰς) s. NRSV ‘sufferings destined for Christ’ (for a parallel expr. in a hostile sense cp. Polyb. 1, 7, 12 τῆς εἰς ἐκείνους τιμωρίας; 1, 69, 7; 38, 1 [4], 13; s. [s.v. ἀνά beg.] Kuhring 13; Rudberg 201).
    w. the vocation, use, or end indicated for, as: αἱρέομαι εἴς τι 2 Th 2:13. ἀφορίζω Ro 1:1; Ac 13:2. προγράφω Ro 15:4; Jd 4. ἀποστέλλω Hb 1:14. πέμπω Phil 4:16; 1 Th 3:2, 5. ποιῶ τι εἰς 1 Cor 10:31; 11:24. S. also under κεῖμαι, προορίζω, τάσσω, τίθημι.—εἰμὶ εἴς τι serve as someth. (s. εἰμί 6; also ins 134, 33ff fr. the Delphinion at Miletus [I A.D.] 1914; s. Dssm., LO 97, 1 [LAE 123]; Ar. 5, 1 ὕδωρ … εἰς χρῆσιν τῶν ἀνθρώπων γέγονε) 1 Cor 14:22; for destruction Col 2:22; as a testimony Js 5:3. Used w. a noun σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἀτιμίαν a vessel meant for honorable, dishonorable use Ro 9:21; cp. vs. 22f; 2 Ti 2:20f; φύλλα τοῦ ξύλου εἰς θεραπείαν Rv 22:2. φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν a light serving as a revelation Lk 2:32. θεράπων εἰς μαρτύριον τῶν λαληθησομένων a servant to bear witness to what would be said Hb 3:5. (Cp. Just., A I, 66, 1 τὸ … εἰς ἀναγέννησιν λουτρόν). W. acc. of pers. (Just., A II, 12, 4 συκοφαντίᾳ τῇ εἰς ἡμᾶς; Tat. 17, 3 τὴν εἰς τοὺς μεμηνότας βοήθειαν) ἡ εἰς ὑμᾶς χάρις the grace meant for you 1 Pt 1:10. διδόναι εἴς τι pay out for someth., money for a field Mt 27:10.
    w. the result of an action or condition indicated into, to, so that: αὐξάνειν εἰς ναόν grow into a temple Eph 2:21. πληροῦσθαι εἴς τι 3:19. λυπηθῆναι εἰς μετάνοιαν be grieved so that repentance takes place 2 Cor 7:9. Of prayer ἀναβαίνειν εἰς μνημόσυνον Ac 10:4. ὁμολογεῖν εἰς σωτηρίαν confess to salvation = so as to receive salvation Ro 10:10; cp. 1:16; 1 Pt 2:2; εἰς ἔπαινον κτλ. to praise etc. 1 Pt 1:7; εἰς βοήθειαν (1 Ch 12:17; Jdth 6:21; JosAs 23:4) Hb 4:16; cp. 10:39; Rv 13:3; Ro 6:16; 8:15; 13:4, 14; 1 Cor 11:34; 2 Cor 2:16 al.; εἰς κενόν (s. κενός 3) 2 Cor 6:1; Gal 2:2; Phil 2:16; 1 Th 3:5. σχίζειν εἰς δύο tear in two Mt 27:51; Mk 15:38. Cp. GPt 5:20 (cp. Polyb. 2, 16, 11; Lucian, Symp. 44, Tox. 54; 1 Km 15:29; Tob 5:3 S; 1 Macc 9:11; Ath. 18, 3 ᾠὸν … εἰς δύο ἐρράγη). W. subst. inf. foll. so that Ro 1:20; 3:26; 4:18; 6:12; 7:4; 1 Th 3:13; 2 Th 2:10f; Hb 11:3 al.
    to denote purpose in order to, to (Appian, Liby. 101 §476 ἐς ἔκπληξιν=in order to frighten; Just., A I, 21, 4 εἰς προτροπήν ‘to spur on’) εἰς ἄγραν in order to catch someth. Lk 5:4. εἰς ἀπάντησιν, συνάντησιν, ὑπάντησίν τινι (s. these 3 entries) to meet someone, toward someone Mt 8:34; 25:1; J 12:13. εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς as a witness, i.e. proof, to them Mt 8:4; 10:18; 24:14 al. εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν for forgiveness of sins, so that sins might be forgiven Mt 26:28; cp. Mk 1:4; Lk 3:3; Ac 2:38. εἰς μνημόσυνόν τινος in memory of someone Mt 26:13; Mk 14:9; cp. Lk 22:19 al. (εἰς μνημόσυνον En 99:3). εἰς ὅ for which purpose (Hdt. 2, 103, 1) Col 1:29; otherw. 2 Th 1:11 with this in view; εἰς τί; why? (Wsd 4:17; Sir 39:16, 21) Mt 14:31; Mk 14:4; 15:34; Hm 2:5; D 1:5. εἰς τοῦτο for this reason or purpose Mk 1:38; Lk 4:43 v.l.; J 18:37; Ac 9:21; 26:16; Ro 9:17; 14:9; 2 Cor 2:9; 1J 3:8; Hs 1:9 (Just., A I, 13, 3). εἰς αὐτὸ τοῦτο for this very reason 2 Cor 5:5; Eph 6:22; Col 4:8. W. subst. inf. foll. (X., Ages. 9, 3, Mem. 3, 6, 2; Just., A I, 9, 5) in order to (oft. LXX; neg. μή in order not to; s. B-D-F §402, 2) Mt 20:19; 26:2; 27:31; Mk 14:55 and oft.—εἰς ὁδόν for the journey 6:8.
    As in Mod. Gk., it is used for the dat., esp. the dat. of advantage, but also= for in general (X., An. 3, 3, 19 τ. ἵππους εἰς ἱππέας κατασκευάσωμεν; Lycurg. 85 διεκαρτέρουν εἰς τ. πατρίδα; UPZ 180a I, 7 [113 B.C.] τὸν εἰς Τάγην οἶκον ᾠκοδομημένον; BGU 37, 4f [51 A.D.] ξύλα εἰς τοὺς ἐλαιῶνάς μου wood for my olive orchards; PLond I, 43, 9 p. 48 [II B.C.]; PTebt 5, 77; POxy 37 I, 9; EpJer 9; Sir 37:7, cp. vs. 8; Jdth 14:2; Bel 3 Theod., vs. 22 LXX) εἰς πάντα τ. λαόν Lk 9:13; cp. 3J 5. εἰς ἡμᾶς Eph 1:19; cp. Col 1:25; 1 Th 4:10; Ro 10:12. χρείαν ἔχειν εἰς τ. ἑορτήν J 13:29; cp. Mk 8:19f; Gal 2:8; 1 Th 2:9; 5:15 et al.—εἰς is commonly used in speaking of the person for whom a payment etc. is made (Dssm., B 113–15; NB 23 [BS 117f; 194f]) 1 Cor 16:1; 2 Cor 8:4; 9:1, 13; Ro 15:26; Ac 24:17. εἰς λόγον τινός in an account for someth. (POxy 275, 19; 21 [66 A.D.]; 496, 10; 530, 15) Phil 4:15; cp. vs. 17. εἰς Χριστόν Phlm 6 prob. in honor of Christ (Tetrast. Iamb. 1, 7, 4 p. 266 εἰς θεούς; Pla., Lysis 205d ᾂδεις εἰς σαυτὸν ἐγκώμιον; Ps.-Pla., Minos 319c; Athen. 15, 667c; Synes., Ep. 75 p. 222b).
    marker of a specific point of reference, for, to, with respect to, with reference to (Arrian, Anab. 6, 26, 3 τοῦτο τὸ ἔργον εἰς καρτερίαν ἐπαινῶ Ἀλεξάνδρου=I praise this deed with regard to Alexander’s endurance; Ath. 31, 1 οὐδὲν χείρους εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον ‘none the worse in respect to excellence’) εὔθετος εἴς τι fit, suitable for someth. Lk 14:35; also εὔχρηστος 2 Ti 4:11. ἡτοιμασμένος ready for 2:21. εὐκαιρέω εἴς τι Ac 17:21. ἱκανόω Col 1:12. ἰσχύω Mt 5:13. περισσεύω 2 Cor 9:8. συνεργέω Ro 8:28. τοῦτο οὐκ εἰς ταύτας τ. ἡμέρας λέγω I say this not with reference to these days Hs 9, 26, 6.—After the verbs ἀπορέομαι, διακρίνομαι, καυχάομαι, παρρησίαν ἔχω, s. these entries. After the adj. ἄκαρπος, ἀκέραιος, βραδύς, σοφός, συνεργός, ὑπήκοος, φρόνιμος, s. these entries. W. acc. of pers. ἀσθενεῖν εἴς τινα be weak toward someone 2 Cor 13:3. εὐδοκεῖν 2 Pt 1:17. λέγειν εἴς τινα say w. reference to someone (Diod S 11, 50, 4; Just., D. 77, 1 εἰς Χριστὸν … εἰρῆσθαι) Ac 2:25.—On Ro 6:17 s. παραδίδωμι 1b end. δέχομαί τινα εἰς ὄνομά τινος Mt 10:41f; s. ὄνομα 1dγא.
    marker of a guarantee, by ὀμνύναι εἴς τι swear by someth. Mt 5:35 (cp. PGiss 66, 8f [early II A.D.] ἐρωτῶ εἰς τὴν τ. θεῶν εὐσέβειαν; but the sole use of εἰς in a series of datives w. ἐν may reflect bilingualism; for prob. Hb. perspective, s. M’Neile, comm. ad loc).
    distributive marker: w. numbers εἰς is distributive ‘-fold’ (cp. ἐστρίς ‘until three times’ Pind., O. 2, 68; GDI IV p. 884, n62, 36 [IV B.C.]) Mk 4:8 v.l. (otherw. ἐς τετρακοσίους, ἐς ὀγδοήκοντα about 400, about 80: Arrian, Anab. 5, 15, 2; 6, 2, 4; 7, 20, 3).
    The predicate nom. and the predicate acc. are somet. replaced by εἰς w. acc. under Semitic influence, which has strengthened Gk. tendencies in the same direction:
    predicate nom.
    α. w. γίνεσθαι (PFay 119, 34 [100 A.D.] ἵνα μὴ εἰς ψωμίον γένηται; Wsd 14:11; 1 Macc 1:36; 10:70; Jdth 5:10, 18 al.) Mt 21:42 (Ps 117:22). ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον Lk 13:19; cp. J 16:20; Ac 5:36; Rv 8:11; 16:19.
    β. w. εἶναι (Bar 2:23; Jdth 5:21, 24; Sir 31:10 et al.) Mt 19:5 (Gen 2:24); Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5; 8:10 (in the last 3 pass. OT expressions are also reproduced). Not fr. the OT: 1J 5:8.
    γ. λογίζεσθαι εἰς (Wsd 2:16; 1 Macc 2:52) Ro 4:3 (Gen 15:6); cp. 2:26; 9:8. λ. εἰς οὐθέν (Is 40:17; Wsd 3:17; cp. 9:6) Ac 19:27.
    predicate acc. (Heliod. 6, 14, 1 τ. πήραν εἰς καθέδραν ποιησαμένη=she used the knapsack as a seat; Vett. Val. 59, 7; 1 Macc 10:54; 11:62; Jdth 5:11 al.; JosAs 13:12 παράθου με αὐτῷ εἰς παιδίσκην) ἐγείρειν τινὰ εἰς βασιλέα Ac 13:22 (cp. 1 Km 13:14). ἀνατρέφεσθαί τινα εἰς υἱόν 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10). τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν 13:47 (cp. Is 49:6). Cp. Mt 21:46; 1 Cl 42:4.—B-D-F §145; 157, 5; Rdm.2 20f; Mlt. 71f; Mlt-H. 462. Johannessohn, Kasus 4f.
    marker of instrumentality, by, with (Arrian, Anab. 5, 12, 3 ἐς ἀκρίβειαν=with care; Vi. Aesopi I G 7 P. νικᾶν εἰς εὐσέβειαν πάντα ψόγον=overcome all censure with piety) εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων Ac 7:53 (=ἐν διαταγαῖς, B-D-F §206, 1). Sim. ὕπαγε εἰς εἰρήνην (1 Km 1:17) Mk 5:34; Lk 7:50; 8:48 (=ἐν εἰρήνῃ). Mlt-Turner 254f.
    Other uses of εἰς
    at, in the face of μετανοεῖν εἰς τὸ κήρυγμα repent at the proclamation Mt 12:41; Lk 11:32; cp. Ro 4:20 and perh. Mt 3:11. JMantey, JBL 70, ’51, 45–48, 309–11 argues for a causal use here because of the proclam., with reff.; against him RMarcus, ibid. 129f; 71, ’52, 43f; JDavis, Restoration Qtrly 24, ’81, 80–88.
    for βαπτίζω εἰς s. βαπτίζω 2c.
    μένειν εἰς remain with (PFay 111, 12 [95/96 A.D.]) so perh. J 6:27.
    in pregnant constructions: σῴζειν εἰς bring safely into 2 Ti 4:18 (cp. X., An. 6, 4, 8; Diod S 2, 48; Cebes 27; SIG 521, 26 [III B.C.], OGI 56, 11; 4 Macc 15:3). διασῴζειν 1 Pt 3:20 (cp. Gen 19:19). μισθοῦσθαι ἐργάτας εἰς τ. ἀμπελῶνα to go into the vineyard Mt 20:1. ἐλευθεροῦσθαι εἰς be freed and come to Ro 8:21. ἀποδιδόναι τινὰ εἰς Αἴγυπτον Ac 7:9 (cp. Gen 37:28). ἔνοχος εἰς τ. γέενναν Mt 5:22; cp. 10:9; Mk 6:8; J 20:7.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰς

  • 12 ἐπαγγελία

    ἐπαγγελία, ας, ἡ (s. ἀγγέλλω; Demosth. et al.; Aristot., EN 10, 1 p. 1164a, 29; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr., Philo, Joseph.) in many authors ἐ. refers to the act of making someth. known publicly, but in our lit. it most often bears the sense of
    declaration to do someth. with implication of obligation to carry out what is stated, promise, pledge, offer (Polyb. 1, 43, 6; 7, 13, 2; 18, 11, 1 al.; Diod S 1, 5, 3; 4, 16, 2; Epict. 1, 4, 3 ἡ ἀρετὴ ταύτην ἔχει τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν εὐδαιμονίαν ποιῆσαι; Michel 473, 10; IPriene 123, 9; 1 Macc 10:15; Philo, Mut. Nom. 201; Jos., Ant. 5, 307).
    of humans ὅπως ἀποδῶμεν τὴν ἐ. ἣν ἐπειγγειλάμεθα so that we might keep our promise GJs 7:1. Of one who lays claim to being a Christian IEph 14:2.
    in our lit. more generally of divine promises (Herm. Wr. in Stob. I 387, 15 W.; Fgm. XXIII 8 v.l.; cp. Herm. Wr. 18, 14; Jos., Ant. 2, 219; Prayer of Manasseh [=Odes 12] 6; PsSol 12:6; perh. Ps 55:9).
    α. God’s promise sg. Ac 2:39; Ro 4:13f, 16; 9:9 (where λόγος is to be supplied w. the gen. ἐπαγγελίας: this word is a word of promise); Gal 3:17; 2 Pt 3:9; 1 Cl 26:1; 2 Cl 15:4; B 5:7; 16:9. Pl. Ro 9:4; 2 Cor 7:1; Gal 3:16; Hb 7:6; 8:6; 11:17; 1 Cl 27:1; H 3, 4; ApcPt Rainer (figura etymol.; cp. 1a and 1bβ). Prep. phrases: διʼ ἐπαγγελίας by or because of a promise Gal 3:18b; 4:23; also ἐξ ἐπαγγελίας 3:18a. ἐν ἐπαγγελίᾳ with promise Eph 6:2. κατʼ ἐπαγγελίαν in accordance w. the promise (PSI 281, 58 κατὰ τ. ἐπανγελίας αὐτου; sim. IK IX–X/2: Nikaia II/1, 702, 6; 1 Esdr 1:7; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 68, 43) Ac 13:23; Gal 3:29; cp. 2 Ti 1:1 (on these three s. New Docs 4, 147).—For var. reasons the gen. is used w. ἐ.: to denote the one fr. whom the promise comes (τ.) θεοῦ Ro 4:20; 2 Cor 1:20; Gal 3:21; 2 Cl 11:1; 1 Ti 1:1 v.l.; to denote the thing promised (Jos., Ant. 3, 77 τ. ἀγαθῶν) ἐ. τ. αἰωνίου κληρονομίας Hb 9:15. τ. ζωῆς 1 Ti 4:8; τ. παρουσίας 2 Pt 3:4; to denote the one(s) for whom the promise is intended τ. πατέρων Ro 15:8 (TestJob 20:1; on βεβαιῶσαι τὰς ἐ. cp. InsPriene 123, 9 ἐβεβαίωσεν τ. ἐπαγγελίαν).—On the other hand, τῆς ἐπαγγελίας is oft. added, as a kind of gen. of quality, to indicate the relation of the noun in question to the promise: γῆ τ. ἐ. the promised land Hb 11:9 (TestAbr A 8 p. 85, 16 [Stone p. 18] al).; τέκνα τ. ἐ. children of the promise, i.e. those born because of the promise Ro 9:8; Gal 4:28; πνεῦμα τ. ἐ. Eph 1:13; διαθῆκαι τ. ἐ. 2:12. As an obj. gen. in πίστις τῆς ἐ. faith in the promise B 6:17.—ἐ. w. inf. foll. εἰσελθεῖν to enter Hb 4:1.—ἐ. γενομένη πρὸς τ. πατέρας a promise made to the fathers Ac 13:32; also εἰς τ. πατ. 26:6 (Diod S 2, 60, 4 γεγενημένη ἐ.=a promise given).—Of Christ’s promise (Orig., C. Cels. 2, 2, 43) 2 Cl 5:5.
    β. w. specification of what was promised (Vi. Aesopi G 79 P.; PsSol 12:6) 1J 2:25 (figura etymol. as Hs 1, 7). Hv 3, 2, 1 (ἐπαγγελίαι w. δῶρα). δεκτὸς τῆς ἐ. recipient of the promised benefit ApcPt Rainer 20. W. epexeg. gen. foll. ἡ ἐ. τοῦ πνεύματος what was promised, namely the Spirit Ac 2:33; Gal 3:14. Foll. by gen. of the one who promises ἐ. τοῦ πατρός Lk 24:49; Ac 1:4; κομίσασθαι τὴν ἐ. Hb 10:36; 11:13 v.l., 39. λαβεῖν Hb 11:13; 2 Cl 11:7; ἀπολαβεῖν B 15:7; Hv 2, 2, 6; ἡ μέλλουσα ἐ. 2 Cl 10:3f.
    γ. It is not always poss. to draw a hard and fast line betw. α and β (cp. Hippol., Ref. 5, 7, 19: ἐ. τοῦ λουτροῦ): Ac 7:17; Gal 3:22; Eph 3:6; Hb 6:12, 15, 17; 11:9b, 33; 1 Cl 10:2; 34:7.—FBaumgärtel, Verheissung: Zur Frage des evang. Verständnisses des AT ’52.
    The pregnant use of ἐ. Ac 23:21 is in effect an extension of mng. 1 and involves two major components: entertainment of a request and approval of it assurance of agreement προσδέχεσθαι τὴν ἀπό τινος ἐ. wait for assurance fr. someone or consent (namely, to do what has been proposed).—DELG s.v. ἄγγελος. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπαγγελία

  • 13 δοῦλος

    1
    δοῦλος, η, ον (s. next entry; Soph. et al.; PGiss 3, 5 ᾧ πάντα δοῦλα; Ps 118:91; Wsd 15:7; Philo; Jos., Ant. 16, 156; Ar. [Milne, 76, 49]; SibOr 3, 567) pert. to being under someone’s total control, slavish, servile, subject τὰ μέλη δ. τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ the members enslaved to impurity Ro 6:19; τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ibid.—Subst. τὰ δοῦλα things subservient PtK 2 (s. ὕπαρξις 1).—DELG. TW.
    2
    δοῦλος, ου, ὁ (Trag., Hdt.et al.; ins, pap, LXX, Philo, Joseph., Test12Patr)
    male slave as an entity in a socioeconomic context, slave (‘servant’ for ‘slave’ is largely confined to Biblical transl. and early American times [s. OED s.v. servant, 3a and b]; in normal usage at the present time the two words are carefully distinguished [Goodsp., Probs., 77–79]). Opp. ἐλεύθερος 1 Cor 7:21. Lit., in contrast
    to a master (Did., Gen. 66, 25): Mt 8:9; 10:24f; cp. J 13:16; 15:20.—Mt 13:27f; 21:34ff; 24:45f, 48, 50; 25:14, 19, 21, 23, 26, 30; cp. Lk 19:13, 15, 17, 22.—Mt 26:51; cp. Mk 14:47; Lk 22:50; J 18:10, 26 (on δοῦλος of the ἀρχιερεύς s. Jos., Ant. 20, 181).—Mk 12:2, 4; 13:34; Lk 7:2f, 8, 10; 12:37, 43, 45ff; 17:7, 9f; J 4:51; Col 4:1 (Billerb. IV 698–744: D. altjüd. Sklavenwesen; SZucrow, Women, Slaves, etc. in Rabb. Lit. ’32; JJeremias, Jerusalem IIb ’37, 184–88; 217–24).—οἱ δ. και οἱ ὑπηρέται J 18:18.—Of slaves sent out with invitations Mt 22:3f, 6, 8, 10; par. Lk 14:17, 21ff; of one who could not pay his debt Mt 18:23, 26ff (but s. 2bα on these pass. fr. Mt). Opp. δεσπότης (as Diod S 15, 8, 2f ὡς δοῦλος δεσπότῃ; Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 5) 1 Ti 6:1; Tit 2:9; οἱ δ. in direct address Eph 6:5; Col 3:22.—For lit. on Christianity and slavery (Ath. 35, 1 δ. εἰσιν ἡμῖν ‘we have slaves’ [who can attest our innocence of the charges]) s. on χράομαι la.—Christ, the heavenly κύριος, appears on earth in μορφὴ δούλου the form of a slave (anticipating vs. 8 w. its ref. to crucifixion, a fate reserved for condemned slaves; for the contrast cp. Lucian, Catapl. 13 δοῦλος ἀντὶ τοῦ πάλαι βασιλέως) Phil 2:7 (lit. on κενόω 1b); cp. Hs 5, 2ff (on this MDibelius, Hdb. 564f).—On Ac 2:18 s. under 2bβ.
    to a free pers. (opp. ἐλεύθερος: Pla., Gorg. 57 p. 502d; Dio Chrys. 9 [10], 4; SIG 521, 7 [III B.C.]; Jos., Ant. 16, 126; Just., D. 139, 5) 1 Cor 7:21f (cp. the trimeter: Trag. Fgm. Adesp. 304 N., quot. fr. M. Ant. 11, 30 and Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 48, δοῦλος πέφυκας, οὐ μέτεστί σοι λόγου=you are a slave, with no share in discussions); 12:13; Gal 3:28; 4:1; Eph 6:8; Col 3:11; Rv 6:15; 13:16; 19:18; IRo 4:3. W. παιδίσκη D 4:10.—House slave in contrast to a son J 8:35; Gal 4:7.
    in contrast to being a fellow Christian οὐκέτι ὡς δοῦλον, ἀλλὰ ὑπὲρ δοῦλον, ἀδελφὸν ἀγαπητόν Phlm 16.
    one who is solely committed to another, slave, subject; ext. of mng. 1. Mt 6:24; Lk 16:13 express the ancient perspective out of which such extended usage develops: slaves are duty-bound only to their owners or masters, or those to whom total allegiance is pledged.
    in a pejorative sense δ. ἀνθρώπων slaves to humans 1 Cor 7:23. παριστάναι ἑαυτόν τινι δοῦλον Ro 6:16. δ. τῆς ἁμαρτίας slave of sin J 8:34; Ro 6:17, 20. τῆς φθορᾶς of destruction 2 Pt 2:19 (cp. Eur., Hec. 865 and Plut., Pelop. 279 [3, 1] χρημάτων; Thu. 3, 38, 5; Dio Chrys. 4, 60 τ. δόξης; Athen. 12, 531c τῶν ἡδονῶν; 542d; Aelian, VH 2, 41 τοῦ πίνειν; Achilles Tat. 6, 19, 4 τ. ἐπιθυμίας).
    in a positive sense
    α. in relation to a superior human being (here the perspective is Oriental and not Hellenic). Of humble service (opp. πρῶτος) Mt 20:27; Mk 10:44. According to oriental usage, of a king’s officials (cp. SIG 22, 4; IMagnMai 115, 4; 1 Km 29:3; 4 Km 5:6; Jos., Ant. 2, 70) ministers Mt 18:23, 26ff (s. Spicq, I 383, n. 14 [Lexique 394, n. 4]); cp. the slaves sent out with invitations 22:3f, 6, 8, 10; Lk 14:17, 21ff (but s. 1a above).
    β. esp. of the relationship of humans to God (with roots in both OT and Hellenic thought; s. δουλεύω 2aβ) δ. τοῦ θεοῦ slave of God=subject to God, owned body and soul (Eur., Ion 309 τοῦ θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε; Cass. Dio 63, 5, 2; CFossey, Inscr. de Syrie: BCH 21, 1897, p. 60 [Lucius calls himself the δοῦλος of the θεὰ Συρία]; PGM 12, 71 δ. τοῦ ὑψ. θεοῦ; 13, 637ff δοῦλός εἰμι σὸς … Σάραπι; 59, 2; 4; LXX; ParJer 6:17 [Baruch]; ApcSed 16:7 p. 137, 15; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 7 al.; Jos., Ant. 11, 90; 101): of Moses (4 Km 18:12; 2 Esdr 19:14; Ps 104:26; Jos., Ant. 5, 39) Rv 15:3. Of recipients of gifts from God’s spirit Ac 2:18 (Jo 3:2). Of Christian prophets Rv 10:7; 11:18 (prophets are also called slaves of God in the OT Jer 25:4; Am 3:7; Da 9:6, 10 Theod.). Of the apostles Ac 4:29; 16:17 (δ. τοῦ θεοῦ τ. ὑψίστου as Da 3:93 Theod.); Tit 1:1; AcPl Ha 6, 35; Christ as master (cp. oriental usage, of a king’s official minister, and the interpretation of δ. in such sense [s. 2bα]) puts his slaves, the apostles, at the disposal of the Corinthians 2 Cor 4:5. Of God-fearing people gener. (Ps 33:23; 68:37 al.) Rv 1:1; Lk 2:29; 1 Pt 2:16; Rv 2:20; 7:3; 19:2, 5; 22:3, 6; 1 Cl 60:2; 2 Cl 20:1; Hv 1, 2, 4; 4, 1, 3; m 3:4 al. The one who is praying refers to himself as your (God’s) slave (cp. Ps 26:9; Ch 6:23; Da 3:33, 44) Lk 2:29; Ac 4:29 (FDölger, ΙΧΘΥΣ I 1910, 195ff).—In the same vein, of one’s relation to Christ δ. Χριστοῦ, self-designation of Paul (on the imagery s. Straub 37; DMartin, Slavery as Salvation: The Metaphor of Slavery in Pauline Christianity ’90) Ro 1:1; Gal 1:10; Phil 1:1; cp. Col 4:12; 2 Ti 2:24; Js 1:1; 2 Pt 1:1; Jd 1; Rv 1:1; 22:3; 1 Cor 7:22; Eph 6:6.—On δοῦλοι and φίλοι of Christ (for this contrast s. Philo, Migr. Abr. 45, Sobr. 55; PKatz, Philo’s Bible ’50, 85ff) J 15:15, s. φίλος 2aα.—Dssm., LO 271ff [LAE 323ff]; GSass, δ. bei Pls: ZNW 40, ’41, 24–32; LReilly, Slaves in Ancient Greece (manumission ins) ’78; COsiek, Slavery in the Second Testament World: BTB 22, ’92, 174–79; JHarril, The Manumission of Slaves in Early Christianity ’95, s. 11–67 on ancient slavery; KBradley, Slavery and Society at Rome ’94; also lit. on χράομαι 1a.—JVogt/HBellen, eds., Bibliographie zur antiken Sklaverei, rev. ed. EHermann/NBrockmeyer ’83 (lists over 5000 books and articles); JCMiller, Slavery and Slaving in World History, A Bibliography 1990–91 ’93 (lit. p. 196–225).—B. 1332. Schmidt, Syn. IV 124–29 s. δεσπότη. New Docs 2, 52–54. DELG. SEG XLII, 1837 (ins reff.). M-M. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > δοῦλος

  • 14 λαγχάνω

    λαγχάνω, [tense] fut.
    A

    λήξομαι Pl.R. 617e

    ; [dialect] Ion. λάξομαι (cf. λάξις) Hdt.7.144: [tense] aor.

    ἔλᾰχον Il.9.367

    , etc.; [dialect] Ep.

    ἔλλαχον h.Cer.87

    , v.l. for ἔλλαβεν in Theoc.25.271; [dialect] Ep.

    λάχον Il.4.49

    , al.; [dialect] Aeol. opt. [ per.] 1sg.

    λαχόην Sapph.9

    (

    λαχοίην A.D. Synt.247.25

    ); for λέλᾰχον v. infr. IV: [tense] pf.

    εἴληχα A.Th. 376

    , 423, etc.: [tense] plpf.

    εἰλήχει Pl.Phd. 107d

    ; poet. and [dialect] Ion.

    λέλογχα Pi.O.1.53

    , B.9.39, Emp.20.3, E.Tr. 282 (lyr.), Hdt.7.53, Test. ap.D.21.82, D.H.4.83, etc., but not in early [dialect] Att. Prose; [ per.] 3pl. λελογχᾰσι ([etym.] ν) Od.11.304, Emp.102, but

    λελᾰχᾱσι Id.115.5

    ; part.

    λελαχώς Phld.D.1.17

    ; [dialect] Dor. [ per.] 3sg.

    λελόγχει Theoc.4.40

    : [tense] plpf.

    ἐλελόγχει Luc. Am.18

    :—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor.

    ἐλήχθην Lys.17.8

    , Is.9.24, D.38.20: [tense] pf.

    εἴληγμαι E.Tr. 296

    , D.30.34; [ per.] 3pl.

    λελάχαται Perict.

    ap. Stob.4.28.19:
    I c. acc. rei, obtain by lot, of spoils, opp. ἐξαιρεῖσθαι, Od.14.233, cf. Il. 9.367, etc.: generally, obtain as one's portion,

    τὸ γὰρ λάχομεν γέρας ἡμεῖς 4.49

    ;

    λαχόντα τε ληΐδος αἶσαν 18.327

    ;

    πρὸς δαιμόνων ὄλβον Pi. N.9.45

    ;

    μέζονας μοίρας λ. Heraclit.25

    ;

    μοῖραν ἴσην, ὡς αὐτοί περ ἐλάγχανον Od.20.282

    , cf. Hdt.7.144: with inf. added, ἔλαχον πολιὴν ἅλα ναιέμεν I had the sea for my portion to dwell in, Il.15.190, cf. Pi.O. 6.34, A.Eu. 931 (anap.);

    ἔλαχ' ἄναξ δούλην σ' ἔχειν E.Tr. 278

    , cf. 282 (lyr.); of a deity as presiding over one's life,

    ἐμὲ μὲν Κὴρ.. λάχε γεινόμενόν περ Il.23.79

    ;

    τῶ σκληρῶ μάλα δαίμονος ὅς με λελόγχει Theoc. 4.40

    ;

    δαίμων ὁ τὴν ἡμετέραν μοῖραν εἰληχώς Lys.2.78

    ;

    ὦ δαῖμον, ὅς με.. εἴληχας Alciphr.3.49

    : also, esp. in [tense] pf., to be the tutelary deity of a place, protect it. [

    Πὰν] πάντα λόφον.. λέλογχε h.Hom.19.6

    ;

    θεοῖσι οἳ Περσίδα γῆν λελόγχασι Hdt.7.53

    ;

    παῖ Ῥέας, ἃ πρυτανεῖα λέλογχας Pi. N.11.1

    ; of Athena,

    ἣ τὴν ὑμετέραν πόλιν ἔλαχε Pl.Ti. 23d

    , cf. E.Or. 319 (lyr.), Ph. 1576 (lyr.): metaph.,

    ἀκέρδεια λέλογχεν θαμινὰ κακαγόρος Pi.O.1.53

    : freq. of persons who have a post assigned to them by lot,

    κλήρῳ νῦν πεπάλασθε διαμπερές, ὅς κε λάχῃσι Il.7.171

    , cf. 179, 23.354, 862: c. inf.,

    κλήρῳ λάχον ἐνθάδ' ἕπεσθαι 24.400

    ; so

    πάλῳ λαχεῖν A.Th.55

    , Hdt.4.94, cf. 3.128;

    ὡς ἐν πύλαις ἕκαστος εἴληχεν πάλον A. Th. 376

    : abs., πρὸς Θύμβρης ἔλαχον Δύκιοι had their post assigned near Thymbra, Il.10.430; ἐπί, ἐν πύλαις λ., A.Th. 423, 451, etc.; λαχών alone, Hdt.3.128, etc.; λ. τινὰ διδάσκαλον have him assigned to one by lot, Antipho 6.11.
    2 at Athens, obtain an office by lot, ἀρχὰς λαχεῖν, opp. χειροτονηθῆναι (to be elected), D.57.25, cf.Ar.Av. 1111;

    οὐδεμίαν [ἀρχὴν] λαχὼν οὐδὲ χειροτονηθείς Aeschin.1.106

    : more freq. c. inf., ὁ τῷ κυάμῳ λαχὼν πολεμαρχέειν he who had the lot to be polemarch, Hdt.6.109;

    ἔλαχον πρότεροι ἀποδιδόναι Th.5.21

    , cf. 35;

    λαχὼν.. ἱερομνημονεῖν Ar.Nu. 623

    ; λαχόντος βουλεύειν when I became Member of Council by lot, D.21.111, cf. 59.3, Pl.Grg. 473e: c. gen., λαχεῖν τῶν ἐξιόντων to be chosen by lot as one of.., D.21.133; also

    οἱ ταμίαι οἱ λαχόντες IG12.91.21

    ; λαχεῖν βασιλεύς, ἐπιμελητής, ἱερεύς, etc., Lys.6.4, Din.2.10, D.57.47, etc.;

    ἐπίσκοπος τῷ κυάμῳ λαχών Ar.Av. 1022

    ; οἱ πεντακόσιοι <οἱ> λαχόντες τῷ κυάμῳ Lexap.And.1.96: abs., κληρούχους τοὺς λαχόντας those on whom the lot fell, Th.3.50, cf. Pl.Lg. 765c;

    τοὺς λαχόντας προέδρους SIG465.6

    (Athens, iii B. C.); rare exc. in Athens, λαχὼν ἱερεύς ib.762.12 (Dionysopolis, i B. C.), etc.
    3 as [dialect] Att. law-term, λαγχάνειν δίκην obtain leave to bring a suit (esp. a private suit), prob. because the presiding magistrates decided the order of hearing by lot; λ. δίκην τινί against one, Pl.Euthphr.5b, Lg. 938b, cf. Aeschin.2.99;

    ἔγκλημά τινι D.34.16

    ; τὸν εἰληχότα τοῦ κλήρου τὴν δίκην the person suing for the inheritance, Is.8.3: without τὴν δίκην, εἴληχε μὲν αὑτῷ τῆς θυγατρὸς τῆς Εὐκτήμονος ὡς οὔσης ἐπικλήρου he has claimed Euctemon's daughter.., Id.6.46, cf. D.48.20;

    λ. τινὶ τοῦ συμβολαίου Lys.17.3

    ;

    λ. φόνου ἐμαυτῷ D.21.120

    ; also λ. τῷ υἱεῖ τῆς ἐπικλήρου prosecute the claim on his son's behalf, And.1.121, cf. 124;

    λ. δίκην τινὶ εἰς τοὺς Ἀμφικτύονας χιλίων ταλάντων ὑπέρ τινος D. 59.98

    , cf. Isoc.16.2: abs.,

    λ. πρὸς τὸν ἄρχοντα Is.11.33

    : metaph.,

    τοῦ σώματος [τῇ ψυχῇ] δίκην λαχόντος Democr.159

    :—[voice] Pass.,

    πρὸς οὓς αἱ δίκαι ἐλήχθησαν Lys.17.8

    ;

    πρὸ τοῦ τὴν δίκην ληχθῆναι D.54.28

    : impers., τούτοις λαγχάνεται proceedings are taken, Id.23.76.
    II c. gen. partit., become possessed of a thing,

    ὥς κεν Ἀχιλλεὺς δώρων ἐκ Πριάμοιο λάχῃ Il.24.76

    ;

    ἔλαχον κτερέων Od.5.311

    , cf. Thgn.934, Pi.I.8(7).69, Fr.75.6, B.1.56, 9.39, Lyr.Adesp.53, Emp.102, 115.5, Democr.21;

    εὖ πραπίδων λαχόντα A.Ag. 380

    (lyr.);

    χρυσῆς.. τιμῆς λαχεῖν S.Ant. 699

    ;

    οὔ τι μὴ λάχωσι τοῦδε συμμάχου Id.OC 450

    ; γέννας

    ἀφθίτου λαχόντες Id.Fr. 278

    ;

    διπλοῦ βίου λαχόντες E.Supp. 1086

    ; πατρῴων οὐ λαχών not having obtained thy patrimony, Id.Tr. 1192;

    τῆς εὐπρεπεστάτης τελευτῆς Th.2.44

    ;

    δείπνου τε καὶ ὕπνου λαγχάνομεν X.Hier.6.9

    ; also

    χθονὸς λαχεῖν τοσοῦτον ἐνθανεῖν μόνον S.OC 790

    ;

    γάμου μέρος λαχοῦσα Id.Ant. 918

    ;

    τύμβου κοινὸν εἰληχὼς μέρος Id.El. 1135

    ;

    τῆς γῆς τὸ πρὸς Νότον εἴληχε Παλλάς Id.Fr.24.8

    .
    III abs., draw lots,

    κατάστασις ἡ διὰ τοῦ λαγχάνειν γιγνομένη Isoc.7.23

    , cf. D.S. 4.63, etc.;

    περί τινος D.21

    Arg.2<*><*> 3, 4, Ev.Jo.19.24.
    IV causal only in [dialect] Ep. redupl. [tense] aor. λέλᾰχον, put in possession of a thing, grant one the rights of..,

    ὄφρα πυρός με Τρῶες.. λελάχωσι θανόντα Il.7.80

    , cf. 15.350, 23.76: later this [tense] aor. is used intr. in AP7.341 (Procl.).
    V intr., fall to one's lot or share, ἐς ἑκάστην [νῆα] ἐννέα λάγχανον αἶγες nine goats were allotted to each, Od.9.160;

    αἰὼν δυσαίων ἔλαχεν E. Hel. 214

    (lyr.);

    ὅσοις.. τὸ σωφρονεῖν εἴληχεν Id.Hipp.80

    ;

    τὸ λαχὸν μέρος ἑκάστῳ τῷ θεῷ Pl.Lg. 745e

    , cf. Epin. 992d;

    τὴν πρὸς Νότον λαχεῖν φασι Δευκαλίωνι Str.9.5.23

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > λαγχάνω

  • 15 κληρονόμος

    κληρονόμος, ου, ὁ (s. two prec. entries; Pla.+; ins, pap, LXX; PsSol 8:11; Philo; Jos., Ant. 13, 322; Tat. 25, 2) gener. ‘heir’.
    one who is designated as heir, heir (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 11 §36 υἱὸς καὶ κ.) Mt 21:38; Mk 12:7; Lk 20:14; Gal 4:1; Hs 5, 2, 6.
    one who receives someth. as a possession, beneficiary, fig. extension of mng. 1: in our lit. of God as the one who bestows (cp. Hs 5, 2, 6; ApcSed 6:2).
    of Christ ὸ̔ν ἔθηκεν κ. πάντων whom God has appointed heir of all things Hb 1:2 (cp. Did., Gen. 41, 23 οὐ γὰρ ὕστερον πεποίηκεν αὐτὸν κληρονόμον, ἀλλʼ ὄντα ἐφανέρωσεν=for [the Father] did not subsequently make him [the Savior] an heir, but revealed him as one who was such).
    of believers; as τέκνα they are: κληρονόμοι, κληρονόμοι θεοῦ Ro 8:17; cp. Gal 4:7. More definitely κ. τῆς διαθήκης τοῦ κυρίου, where διαθήκη (q.v. 2) fluctuates betw. ‘last will and testament’ and ‘decree’ B 6:19; 13:6. κατʼ ἐπαγγελίαν κληρονόμοι heirs according to the promise Gal 3:29 (on the imagery s. Straub 96f); cp. Hb 6:17. κ. τῆς βασιλείας heirs of the kingdom Js 2:5. ἵνα κληρονόμοι γενηθῶμεν κατʼ ἐλπίδα ζωῆς αἰωνίου that we might become heirs in accordance w. the hope of eternal life Tit 3:7. τῆς κατὰ πίστιν δικαιοσύνης ἐγένετο κ. he (Noah) became an heir of the righteousness that comes by faith Hb 11:7 (on the gen. of the abstract noun cp. Demosth. 22, 34 κ. τῆς ἀτιμίας). Abraham and all those who are expecting the ‘righteousness of faith’ as he did, are κ. κόσμου, in contrast to those who depend on the law Ro 4:13f (cp. Philo, Somn. 1, 175 τῶν τοῦ κόσμου κληρονόμον μερῶν).—On inheritance in Paul, esp. in Gal, s. MConrat, ZNW 5, 1904, 204–27; OEger, ibid. 18, 1918, 84–108; WCalder, JTS 31, 1930, 372–74.—B. 779. DELG s.v. κλῆρος and νέμω. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κληρονόμος

  • 16 ψάλλω

    ψάλλω fut. ψαλῶ (Aeschyl.+; ins, LXX; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 26f [Stone p. 54]; TestJob 14:2, 4; Jos., Ant. 11, 67; 12, 349; Just.; Mel., P. 80, 588; Did.) in our lit., in accordance w. OT usage, to sing songs of praise, with or without instrumental accompaniment, sing, sing praise w. dat. of the one for whom the praise is intended τῷ ὀνόματί σου ψαλῶ Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). ψαλλῶ σοι B 6:16 (Ps 107:4). τῷ κυρίῳ Eph 5:19: in this pass. a second dat. is added τῇ καρδίᾳ ὑμῶν in or with your hearts; here ψ. is found with ᾂδω (as Ps 26:6; 32:3; 56:8), and the question arises whether a contrast betw. the two words is intended. The original mng. of ψ. was ‘pluck’, ‘play’ (a stringed instrument); this persisted at least to the time of Lucian (cp. Par. 17). In the LXX ψ. freq. means ‘sing’, whether to the accompaniment of an instrument (Ps 32:2, 97:5 al.) or not, as is usually the case (Ps 7:18; 9:12; 107:4 al.). This focus on singing continued until ψ. in Mod. Gk. means ‘sing’ exclusively; cp. ψάλτης=singer, chanter, w. no ref. to instrumental accompaniment. Although the NT does not voice opposition to instrumental music, in view of Christian resistance to mystery cults, as well as Pharisaic aversion to musical instruments in worship (s. EWerner, art. ‘Music’, IDB 3, 466–69), it is likely that some such sense as make melody is best understood in this Eph pass. Those who favor ‘play’ (e.g. L-S-JM; ASouter, Pocket Lexicon, 1920; JMoffatt, transl. 1913) may be relying too much on the earliest mng. of ψάλλω. ψ. τῷ πνεύματι and in contrast to that ψ. τῷ νοί̈ sing praise in spiritual ecstasy and in full possession of one’s mental faculties 1 Cor 14:15. Abs. sing praise Js 5:13. WSmith, Musical Aspects of the NT, ’62; HSeidel, TRE XXIII 441–46.—DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ψάλλω

  • 17 ἱκνέομαι

    ἱκνέομαι, lengthd. form of ἵκω (q. v.), ἱκάνω, wh. are the Homeric forms of the [tense] pres. (exc. ἱκνεύμεναι, ἱκνεύμεσθα, Od.9.128, 24.339), first in Alc.98 (s. v.l.): [tense] impf.
    A

    ἱκνεῖτο S.OC 970

    : [tense] fut.

    ἵξομαι Il.6.502

    , Parm. 3.2, A.Supp. 159 (lyr.); [dialect] Dor.

    ἱξοῦμαι AP9.341

    (Glauc.): [tense] aor. 2

    ἱκόμην Il.8.149

    , etc.; inf.

    ἴκεσθαι Sapph.Supp.1.2

    [[pron. full] , exc. when lengthd. by the augm.]; for part. ἴκμενος v. sub voce: [tense] pf.

    ἷγμαι S.Tr. 229

    , part.

    ἱγμένος Id.Ph. 494

    : non-thematic [tense] aor. 2

    ἷκτο Hes.Th. 481

    , [Simon.] 179.4, Euph.2: ( ἀφικνέομαι is used in early Prose, exc. in signf. 111; ἵκοντο is f.l. in Th.5.40, ἵκηται is a poet. reminiscence in Pl.Phdr. 276d; but ἵκετο is found in Hdt.1.216,

    ἵκηται Hp.Loc.Hom. 47

    ; also in later Prose, Luc.Salt.5, DDeor.6.4, Procop.Pers.1.4, 2.21):— come,

    αἶψα δ' ἵκοντο Il.18.532

    ; ὁπότε Κρήτηθεν ἵκοιτο when he came to us.., 3.233; ὑπότροπον οἴκαδ' ἱ. Od.22.35;

    ἐς χῶρον Il.4.446

    ;

    ἐπὶ νῆας 6.69

    ;

    κατὰ λειμῶνα Od.24.13

    ;

    πρὸς γούνατα Hes.Th. 460

    ;

    ὑπὸ πτόλιν Il.11.182

    ;

    εἰς ὁμόν Parm.8.46

    ;

    πρὸς ὁμοῖον Emp.62.6

    ;

    τυῖδ' ἴκεσθαι Sapph.

    l.c.: freq. in Hom., c. acc., arrive at,

    ἵκετο νῆας Il.8.149

    ;

    τέλος ἵκεο μύθων 9.56

    ;

    οἶκον.. καὶ σὴν ἐς πατρίδα γαῖαν Od.23.258

    ; later

    ἱκέσθαι γαῖαν Pi.P.4.118

    codd.;

    βένθος Emp.35.3

    ;

    ἄλσος A.Supp. 556

    (lyr.);

    στέγας S.OT 534

    , etc.
    2 reach, attain to, ποσὶν οὖδας ἱ. Od.8.376; οὐδ' ἵκετο χρόα καλόν, of a spear, Il.11.352;

    οὐδ' ὀστέον ἵκετο Od.19.451

    (v. ὑπερίημι); so of things, ἠχή, καπνὸς αἰθέρ' ἱ., Il.13.837, 18.207;

    ἔμπης ἐς γαῖάν τε καὶ οὐρανὸν ἵκετ' ἀϋτμή 14.174

    ;

    ἐς πόλιν ἵκετ' ἀϋτή Od.14.265

    ; of Time, ἥβης μέτρον or ἥβην ἱ., Il.11.225, 24.728, etc.;

    γήραος οὐδόν Od.15.246

    ; so

    ἐπὶ γῆρας 8.227

    ; ἠῶ ἱ. live till morn, 17.497; also ὀλέθρου πείραθ' ἱ. Il.6.143;

    λέκτροιο παλαιοῦ θεσμὸν ἵκοντο Od.23.296

    , cf. 354; θίλην ἐπὶ γένναν ἵ. Emp. 110.9;

    ἐς ἄπειρον Xenoph.28

    ;

    ἐς τὸ τυθῆναι Hdt.1.216

    ;

    εἰς τὸ λήθης γῆρας Pl.Phdr.

    l.c.:—in various phrases, ἱ. μετὰ κλέος come in quest of glory, Il.11.227; ἐς χεῖρας ἱ. come into one's power, 10.448; ὅ τι χεῖρας ἵκοιτο whatever came to hand, Od.12.331; ἱ. ἐς γενεάν τινος into his family, Pi.N.10.14; ἐς λόγους τοὺς σοὺς ἱ. to speak with thee, S.El. 315; ἐνθάδ' ἵξομαι shall come to this at last, Id.Aj. 1365; ἤν ποτε δασμὸς ἵκηται if ever a division come about, Il.1.166.
    II with a person as object, τινα ib. 139, etc.;

    ἔς τινα Od. 6.176

    ; but also, come to his house, 20.372; Πηλεΐωνάδ' ἵ. to the hut of the son of P., Il.24.338; μετὰ Τρῶας ἱ. 3.264: rarely c. dat., ἐπειγομένοισι δ' ἵκοντο came to them at need, 12.374; cf.

    ἱκάνω 11

    .
    3 approach as suppliant,

    τὴν ἱκόμην φεύγων 14.260

    , cf. 22.123;

    τὰ σὰ γοῦνα ἱκόμεθ' Od.9.267

    ;

    θεοὺς προστροπαῖς ἱκνουμένη A.Pers. 216

    (troch.);

    Ζῆνα.. ἱξόμεσθα σὺν κλάδοις Id.Supp. 159

    (lyr.); [θεὸν] θυέεσσιν ἱκνεῖσθαι approach a god with offerings and prayer, Theoc.Ep.8.3.
    b Poet. in [tense] pres., supplicate, beseech,

    τάσδε τὰς θεὰς καλῶν ἱκνοῦμαι S.OC 1011

    ;

    καί σε πρὸς τοῦ σοῦ τέκνου καὶ θεῶν ἱκνοῦμαι μή.. Id.Aj. 588

    , cf. OC 275, Ph. 470; ταύτης ἱκνοῦμαί ς' E.Or. 671: c. inf.,

    πάντες σ' ἱκνοῦνται.. θάψαι νεκρούς Id.Supp. 130

    : freq. parenthetic, S.Ph. 932, El. 136 (lyr.), Ar.Ec. 958, Tim.Pers. 139.
    III [tense] pres. and [tense] impf., it becomes, befits, pertains to, c. acc. et inf.,

    φαμὲν ἡμέας ἱκνέεσθαι ἡγεμονεύειν Hdt.9.26

    ; τοὺς μάλιστα ἱκνέεται (sc. κεκάρθαι) Id.2.36; ἱκνέεται it is usual that.., Hp.Art.63; later, not impers.,

    οὗ ἡ ἱερουργία ἱκνεῖτο D.C.Fr.25.5

    ;

    ὅ[σα τᾶς δίκας ἱ] κνεῖται SIG953.46

    (Cnidos, ii B.C.).
    b αὐτὸς καὶ ὧν ἱκνεῖται, of a man and those to whom he belongs, i.e. his family, ib.46.25, al. (Halic.).
    2 freq. in part., τὸ ἱκνεύμενον that which is fitting, proper, Hdt.6.84; ὁ ἱ., with or without χρόνος, the fit, proper time, Hp.Aër.7, Hdt.6.86.ά; ἐν ἱκνουμένᾳ ἁμέρᾳ Orac. ap. D.43.66; τὸ ἱ. ἀνάλωμα the quota of expense, Th.1.99;

    κατὰ τοὺς ἱ. χρόνους Arist.GA 750b13

    (also of the latter days, D.H. 1.66);

    ἱ. καιροί Thphr.CP1.13.3

    ;

    τὰ -ούμενα μεγέθη Arist.GA 772a8

    ;

    ἡ ἱ. ἐπιστήμη Id.Pol. 1288b16

    ; τῆς ἱ. ἡλικίας τυχεῖν ib. 1332b41; also ἱκνούμεναι ἀποδείξεις convincing proofs, Phld.Piet.79; οὐδὲν εἴρηται ἱ. S.E.M.1.205; λόγος τινὶ ἱκνούμενος favourable, SIG679.77 (Magn. Mae., ii B.C.). Adv. ἱκνουμένως, [dialect] Ion. - ευμένως, fittingly, aright, Hdt. 6.65, Hp.Mul.2.135, M.Ant.5.12.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἱκνέομαι

  • 18 πιστεύω

    πιστεύω (Trag.+) impf. ἐπίστευον; 1 aor. ἐπίστευσα; pf. πεπίστευκα; plpf. πεπιστεύκειν Ac 14:23 (on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Pass.: fut. 3 pl. πιστευθήσονται Gen 42, 20; 1 aor. ἐπιστεύθην; pf. πεπίστευμαι (the word does not occur in Phlm, 2 Pt, 2 and 3J, Rv, MPol, or D. But it is a special favorite of J and 1J, where it is found 96 times and 9 times respectively; πίστις is not found in the gospel at all, and occurs in 1J only once, 5:4. Our lit. uses it quite predominantly in a transcendent sense, or at least w. transcendent coloring).
    to consider someth. to be true and therefore worthy of one’s trust, believe
    believe (in) someth., be convinced of someth., w. that which one believes (in) indicated
    α. by acc. of thing (Soph., Oed. Rex 646 τάδε; Aristot., Analyt. Pr. 2, 23, 68b, 13 ἅπαντα; PSI 494, 14 μηθέν; UPZ 70, 29 [152/151 B.C.] π. τὰ ἐνύπνια; ApcEsdr 7:12 p. 32, 26 τὸ βιβλίον τοῦτο) ἡ ἀγάπη πάντα πιστεύει 1 Cor 13:7. πεπιστεύκαμεν τὴν ἀγάπην we believe in the love 1J 4:16. πιστεύεις τοῦτο; J 11:26b. Cp. Ac 13:41 (Hab 1:5). Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν our testimony was believed 2 Th 1:10b (cp. Aristot., EN 10, 2 p. 1172b, 15 ἐπιστεύοντο οἱ λόγοι; Gen 42:20).
    β. by means of a ὅτι-clause believe that (Plut., Mor. 210d; Aelian, VH 1, 16 p. 8, 9; Herm. Wr. 4, 4: Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24; PLond III, 897, 12 p. 207 [I A.D.]; Tob 10:8 S; Job 9:16; 15:31; 39:12; La 4:12; 4 Macc 7:19; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 18 [Stone p. 48]; ParJer 6:7; Just., A I, 18, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 16) μακαρία ἡ πιστεύσασα ὅτι ἔσται τελείωσις Lk 1:45 (ὅτι here may=for: s. ὅτι 4b).—Mk 11:23; cp. vs. 24; J 8:24 (ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι as Is 43:10); 11:27, 42; 13:19; 14:10; 16:27, 30; 17:8, 21; 20:31a; Ac 9:26; Ro 6:8; 10:9; 1 Th 4:14; Hb 11:6; Js 2:19a; 1J 5:1, 5; Hv 3, 8, 4; 4, 2, 4; m 1:1; 6, 2, 10b; Hs 2:5.—[ὅτι εἷς θεός] καὶ εἷς χριστός AcPl Ha 1, 17; AcPlCor 1:8. π. περί τινος ὅτι believe concerning someone that J 9:18 (M. Ant. 1, 15, 5 πιστεύειν περὶ ὧν λέγοι ὅτι οὕτως φρονεῖ=believe concerning whatever he might say, that it was what he actually thought; Just., D. 10, 1 π. ἡμῶν• ὅτι ἐσθίομεν ἀνθρώπους.—π. περί τινος as Plut., Lyc. 19, 4; Jos., Ant. 14, 267).
    γ. by the acc. and inf. (pres. Pla., Gorg. 524a; PTebt 314, 3 [II A.D.]; 4 Macc 5:25; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 160; Just., A I, 8, 2 al.; Ath. 20, 3) πιστεύω τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ac 8:37b.—GMary 463, 8.—IRo 10:2.—By the inf. (Thu 2, 22, 1; Job 15:22; AscIs 2:10 εἰς οὐρανὸν ἀναβῆναι) πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι Ac 15:11 (difft. JNolland, NTS 27, ’80, 112f [inf. of result: ‘we believe (in order) to be saved’]).—By the acc. and ptc. ἐν σαρκὶ αὐτὸν πιστεύω ὄντα I believe that he was in the flesh ISm 3:1.
    δ. by means of the dat. of thing give credence to, believe (Aeschyl., Pers. 786 θεῶν θεσφάτοισιν; Soph., Phil. 1374 τοῖς ἐμοῖς λόγοις, El. 886; Pla., Phd. 88c, Leg. 7, 798d; Polyb. 5, 42, 9; 9, 33, 1; Herodian 7, 5, 5 ἐλπίδι κρείττονι; BGU 674, 6 τῷ λόγῳ; 2 Ch 9:6 τοῖς λόγοις; Ps 105:24; Pr 14:15; Sir 19:15; En 104:13 ταῖς βίβλοις; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 τοῖς κενοῖς λογισμοῖς, Virt. 68 the sayings of God; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 286, Ant. 10, 39 τ. λόγοις; Tat. 18, 2 ὕλης οἰκονομία; Ath. 30, 2 ταῖς γοναῖς τοῦ Διό; Iren. 1, 10, 2 [Harv. I 92, 4] ἡ ἐκκλησία … π. τούτοις [sc. κήρυγμα and πίστις]) οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου Lk 1:20 (cp. Iambl., ViPyth. 28, 148 περὶ θεῶν μηδὲν θαυμαστὸν ἀπιστεῖν ‘concerning the gods nothing is so marvelous that it should occasion unbelief’). τῇ γραφῇ καὶ τῷ λόγῳ J 2:22. Cp. 4:50; 5:47ab. τοῖς γεγραμμένοις Ac 24:14 (Diod S 16, 52, 7 πιστεύσαντες τοῖς γεγραμμένοις). τῇ ἐπαγγελίᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cl 11:1 (Diod S 1, 53, 10 τῇ τοῦ προρρήσει πιστεύειν; 19, 90, 3). τῷ ψεύδει, τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 2 Th 2:11, 12. τῇ καταλαλιᾷ Hm 2:2. τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν (Is 53:1; cp. Jos., C. Ap. 2, 14 π. ἀκοῇ πρεσβυτέρων) J 12:38; Ro 10:16; 1 Cl 16:3. τοῖς ἔργοις J 10:38b (=their testimony); Hm 6, 2, 10a (that they are good and must be followed).—Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τῷ λόγῳ μου they believed my word Hm 3:3.
    ε. w. prepositional expressions: εἰς Ro 4:18, if εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτόν here is dependent on ἐπίστευσεν. πιστεύειν εἰς τὴν μαρτυρίαν believe in the witness 1J 5:10c. ὁ Χριστιανισμὸς οὐκ εἰς Ἰουδαϊσμὸν ἐπίστευσεν the Christian way of life/Christianity did not commit itself to the Judean way/Judaism (s. Hdb. ad loc.) I Mg 10:3a; cp. b (Χριστιανισμόν, εἰς ὸ̔ν πᾶσα γλῶσσα πιστεύσασα). On πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄνομά τινος s. 2aβ below. πιστεύετε ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ believe in the gospel (so Ps 105:12 ἐπίστευσαν ἐν τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ. Rather in the sense ‘put one’s trust in’ Sir 32:21 μὴ πιστεύσῃς ἐν ὁδῷ ἀπροσκόπῳ. See B-D-F §187, 6; Rob. 540. ALoisy, Les Évangiles synopt. I 1907, 430; 434; comm.) Mk 1:15 (Hofmann understands it as ‘on the basis of’, Wohlenberg ‘bei’; Lohmeyer is undecided; Dssm. and Mlt. 67f ‘in the sphere of’; s. p. 235). ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ οὐ πιστεύω IPhld 8:2 (s. Bihlmeyer ad loc.).—ἐπί τινι: πιστεύειν ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33 (Is 28:16).
    w. the pers. to whom one gives credence or whom one believes, in the dat. (Demosth. 18, 10; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 14 p. 1390a, 32; Polyb. 15, 26, 6 τοῖς εἰδόσι τὴν ἀλήθειαν; Herodian 2, 1, 10; PHib 72, 18; POxy 898, 29; PTebt 418, 15; Ex 4:1, 5; 3 Km 10:7; 2 Ch 32:15; Tob 2:14; Jer 47:14; JosAs 13:10; Philo, Praem. 49; Just., A I, 33, 5, D 7, 2 al.) τοῖς θεασαμένοις αὐτὸν ἐγηγερμένον οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they did not believe those who saw him after he was raised from the dead Mk 16:14. Cp. Mt 21:25, 32abc; Mk 11:31; 16:13; Lk 20:5; J 5:46a; Ac 8:12; 26:27a (τ. προφήταις as Jos., Ant. 11, 96); 1J 4:1; Hm 6, 1, 2ab.—Also of Jesus and God whom one believes, in that one accepts their disclosures without doubt or contradiction: Jesus: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 5:38, 46b; 6:30; 8:45, 46; 10:37, 38a. God: J 5:24; Ro 4:3 (Gen 15:6), 17 κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ (= κατέναντι θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστευσεν); Gal 3:6; Js 2:23; 1 Cl 10:6 (all three Gen 15:6). ὁ μὴ πιστεύων τῷ θεῷ ψεύστην πεποίηκεν αὐτόν 1J 5:10b. AcPl Ha 3, 7.
    w. pers. and thing added π. τινί τι believe someone with regard to someth. (X., Apol. 15 μηδὲ ταῦτα εἰκῇ πιστεύσητε τῷ θεῷ) Hm 6, 2, 6.—W. dat. of pers. and ὅτι foll. (ApcEsdr 4:35 p. 29, 12 Tdf.): πιστεύετέ μοι ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί J 14:11a. Cp. 4:21; Ac 27:25.
    abs. (in which case the context supplies the obj., etc.; cp. ParJer 7:19 γέγονε δὲ τοῦτο, ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν) ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ• ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, μὴ πιστεύσητε do not believe (him or it [the statement]) Mt 24:23; cp. vs. 26; Mk 13:21; Lk 22:67; J 3:12ab; 10:25f; 12:47 v.l.; 14:29; 16:31; 19:35; 20:8, 25; cp. GJs 19:3. J 20:29ab πιστεύσαντες those who have nevertheless believed (it=the fact of the Resurrection); Ac 4:4; 26:27b; 1 Cor 11:18 πιστεύω I believe (it=that there are divisions among you); 15:11; Js 2:19b even the daemons believe this; Jd 5. Pass. καρδίᾳ πιστεύεται with (or in) the heart men believe (it=that Jesus was raised fr. the dead) Ro 10:10.
    believe = let oneself be influenced κατά τινος against someone Pol 6:1.
    πιστεύομαι I am believed, I enjoy confidence (X., An. 7, 6, 33; Diod S 5, 80, 4 τοῖς μάλιστα πιστευομένοις ἐπηκολουθήσαμεν; 17, 32, 1; 1 Km 27:12; Jos., Ant. 10, 114; PGM 12, 279 πιστευθήσῃ=you will be believed) of Eve παρθένος πιστεύεται people believe that she is a virgin Dg 12:8, or perh. a virgin is entrusted (to someone without fear). S. 3 below.
    to entrust oneself to an entity in complete confidence, believe (in), trust, w. implication of total commitment to the one who is trusted. In our lit. God and Christ are objects of this type of faith that relies on their power and nearness to help, in addition to being convinced that their revelations or disclosures are true. The obj. is
    given
    α. in the dat. (cp. Soph., Philoct. 1374 θεοῖς πιστ.; X., Mem. 1, 1, 5; Ps.-Pla., Epinom. 980c πιστεύσας τοῖς θεοῖς εὔχου; Ptolem. Lagi [300 B.C.]: 138 Fgm. 8 Jac.; Maximus Tyr. 3, 8k τῷ Ἀπόλλωνι; Epict., app. E, 10 p. 488 Sch. θεῷ; Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 18 πῶς Διονύσῳ πιστεύσω; how can I trust D.?; UPZ 144, 12 [164 B.C.] τ. θεοῖς; Jdth 14:10; Wsd 16:26; 4 Macc 7:21 al. in LXX; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 πιστεύειν θεῷ, Rer. Div. Her. 92 μόνῳ θεῷ, Op. M. 45, Sacr. Abel. 70 τῷ σωτήρι θεῷ, Abr. 269, Mos. 1, 225, Virt. 216 [on faith in Philo s. Bousset, Rel.3 446ff; EHatch, Essays in Biblical Gk. 1889, 83ff; ASchlatter, D. Glaube im NT4 1927; EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1908, 21925; HWindisch, Die Frömmigkeit Philos 1909, 23ff; HWolfson, Philo ’47 I, 143–56, esp. II, 215–18; WPeisker, D. Glaubensbegriff bei Philon, diss. ’36]; Jos., Ant. 2, 117; 333; 3, 309; 20, 48, Bell. 3, 387 [s. ASchlatter, D. Theol. d. Judentums nach d. Bericht des Jos. ’32, 104ff]; Just., A I, 18, 6 al.). Some of the passages referred to in 1b above, end, are repeated, since they may be classified here or there w. equal justification. Of God: π. τῷ θεῷ (Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 15) Ac 16:34; 13:12 D; Tit 3:8; PtK 4 p. 16, 2; B 16:7; Hm 12, 6, 2; Hs 5, 1, 5. Cp. m 1:2; AcPl Ha 10, 13f. τῷ κυρίῳ (Sir 11:21; 2:8) Hv 4, 2, 6. οἱ πιστεύσαντες τῷ κυρίῳ διὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 13, 5. τῷ θεῷ w. ὅτι foll. m 9:7; cp. Hs 1:7.—Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l. (for ἐπʼ αὐτόν); J 6:30 (σοί=vs. 29 εἰς ὸ̔ν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος); J 8:31 (αὐτῷ=vs. 30 εἰς αὐτόν, but see Mlt. 67f; JSwetnam argues for a plpf. sense here: Biblica 61, ’80, 106–9); Ac 5:14; 18:8a (both τῷ κυρίῳ); Ro 10:14b (οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν = τούτῳ [about equivalent to εἰς τοῦτον; cp. vs. 14a] οὗ οὐκ ἤκ.); 2 Ti 1:12; ITr 9:2; Hs 8, 3, 2.—Pass. be believed in (X., Cyr. 4, 2, 8; 6, 1, 39; Pla., Lach. 181b; Ps.-Demosth. 58, 44 al.; 1 Km 27:12; Just., D. 7, 3; Tat. 10, 2. S. B-D-F §312, 1; also s. Rob. 815f) ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Ti 3:16.—π. τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ υἱοῦ believe in the name of the Son, i.e. believe in the Son and accept what his name proclaims him to be 1J 3:23.
    β. w. εἰς (cp. Hippol., Elench. 6, 19, 7 W. οἱ εἰς τὸν Σίμωνα καὶ τὴν Ἑλένην πεπιστευκότες; Just., D. 35, 8 al.) God (BGU 874, 11 π. εἰς τὸν θεόν): J 12:44b; 14:1a (cp. ET 21, 1910, 53–57; 68–70; 138f); 1 Pt 1:21 v.l.=Pol 2:1.—Christ: Mt 18:6; Mk 9:42; J 2:11; 3:15 v.l., 16, 18a, 36; 4:39; 6:29, 35, 40, 47 v.l.; 7:5, 31, 38f, 48; 8:30; 9:35f; 10:42; 11:25, 26a, 45, 48; 12:11, 36 (εἰς τὸ φῶς), 37, 42, 44a, 46; 14:1b, 12; 16:9; 17:20; Ac 10:43; 14:23; 18:8 D; 19:4; Ro 10:14a; Gal 2:16; Phil 1:29; 1 Pt 1:8; 1J 5:10a; AcPlCor 2:31; Hs 8, 3, 2.—εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ (or αὐτοῦ, etc.) J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18c; 1J 5:13 (s. ὄνομα 1dβ and s. 2aα above, end). π. εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ITr 2:1. π. εἰς τὸ αἷμα Χριστοῦ ISm 6:1.
    γ. w. ἐπί and dat., of God Ac 11:17 D. Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 3:15 v.l.; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16); 1 Ti 1:16.
    δ. w. ἐπί and acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 46, 1 al.) of God: Ac 16:34 D; Ro 4:5, 24; PtK 3 p. 15, 12. Of Christ: Mt 27:42; J 3:15 v.l.; Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19.
    ε. π. ἔν τινι believe in someone (Jer 12:6; Da 6:24 Theod.; Ps 77:22) is questionable in our lit.: in J 3:15 the best rdg. is ἐν αὐτῷ and is prob. to be construed w. ἔχῃ (in J πιστεύω usually takes the prep. εἰς when expressing the obj. of belief, as in 3:16); in Eph 1:13 both occurrences of ἐν ᾧ are prob. to be construed w. ἐσφραγίσθητε (=‘in connection with whom you have been sealed’ [cp. 4:30]); the acts of hearing and believing are coordinate, and πιστεύσαντες, along w. ἀκούσαντες, is used abs. (so REB; less clearly NRSV). But s. 1aε above: π. ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ Mk 1:15; IPhld 8:2.
    not expressed at all (the abs. πιστεύειν in a transcendent sense: Aeschin., In Ctesiph. 1 ἐγὼ πεπιστευκὼς ἥκω πρῶτον τοῖς θεοῖς; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 17, 1391b, 1ff; Plut., Mor. 170f; Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24 πιστεῦσαι δεῖ, ὅτι [=because] μόνη σωτηρία ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἐπιστροφή; Herm. Wr. 9, 10ab ἐπίστευσε καὶ ἐν τῇ καλῇ πίστει ἐπανεπαύσατο; cp. 1, 32 πιστεύω καὶ μαρτυρῶ=PapBerl 9795 [RReitzenstein, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, p. 161, 2]; Num 20:12; Ps 115:1; Is 7:9; Sir 2:13; 1 Macc 2:59; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 14; 101, Deus Imm. 4, Mut. Nom. 178; τότε πιστεύσεις θέλων καὶ μὴ θέλων Theoph. Ant. 1, 8 [p. 74, 7]) Mk 15:32; 16:16f; Lk 8:12f; J 1:7, 50; 3:15, 18b; 4:41f, 48, 53; 5:44; 6:36, 47, 64ab, perh. 69 (MEnslin, The Perf. Tense in the Fourth Gosp.: JBL 55, ’36, 121–31, esp. 128); 9:38; 10:26; 11:15, 40; 12:39; 20:31b; Ac 4:4; 8:13, 37a; 11:21; 13:12, 39, 48; 14:1; 15:5, 7; 17:12, 34; 18:8b, 27; 19:2; 21:25; Ro 1:16; 3:22; 4:11; 10:4; 13:11; 15:13; 1 Cor 1:21; 3:5; 15:2; Gal 3:22; Eph 1:13, 19; 1 Th 2:10, 13; Hb 4:3; 1 Pt 2:7; 1 Cl 12:7; 2 Cl 17:3; 20:2; B 9:3; B 11:11; ISm 3:2; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 17, 4; 9, 22, 3. τὸ πιστεύειν faith IMg 9:2. ἐν ἀγάπῃ πιστεύειν IPhld 9:2 (ἐν ἀγάπῃ is here used adv.).—Participles in the var. tenses are also used almost subst.: (οἱ) πιστεύοντες (the) believers, (the) Christians (Orig., C. Cels. 1, 13, 34; Did., Gen. 106, 6) Ac 2:44; Ro 3:22; 1 Cor 14:22ab (opp. οἱ ἄπιστοι); 1 Th 1:7; Hs 8, 3, 3. (οἱ) πιστεύσαντες (those) who made their commitment = (those) who became believers, (the) Christians, Ac 2:44 v.l.; 4:32; 2 Th 1:10a; 2 Cl 2:3; Hs 9, 19, 1. οἱ πεπιστευκότες those who became (and remained) believers Ac 19:18; 21:20 (Just., D. 122, 2).—οἱ μέλλοντες πιστεύειν future believers 1 Cl 42:4; Hm 4, 3, 3a. οἱ νῦν πιστεύσαντες those who have just come to believe ibid. 4, 3, 3b.
    A special kind of this faith is the confidence that God or Christ is in a position to help suppliants out of their distress, have confidence (some of the passages already mentioned might just as well be classified here) abs. ὡς ἐπίστευσας γενηθήτω σοι may it be done to you in accordance with the confidence you have Mt 8:13. ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσητε πιστεύοντες whatever you pray for with confidence 21:22. Cp. Mk 5:36; 9:23f; Lk 8:50; 2 Cor 4:13a (Ps 115:1), b. W. ὅτι foll.: πιστεύετε ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; do you have confidence that I am able to do this? Mt 9:28.—Mk 11:23.
    entrust τινί τι someth. to someone (X., Mem. 4, 4, 17; Plut., Mor. 519e; Athen. 8, 341a; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 25, 1; SIG2 845, 7, see for numerous other examples index VI p. 384b. Cp. Wsd 14:5; 1 Macc 8:16; 4 Macc 4:7; TestJob 11:11; Jos., Bell. 4, 492; Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 6) τὸ ἀληθινὸν τίς ὑμῖν πιστεύσει; Lk 16:11. αὐτῷ τοσούτων πιστευο̣μ̣έ̣ν̣ω̣ν̣ since so many (or so much) were ( was) entrusted to him AcPl Ha 7, 21 (connection uncertain). αὐτόν (so N. and Tdf.; v.l. ἑαυτόν) τινι trust oneself to someone (Brutus, Ep. 25; Plut., Mor. 181d ἀνδρὶ μᾶλλον ἀγαθῷ πιστεύσας ἑαυτὸν ἢ ὀχυρῷ τόπῳ=entrusting himself to a good man rather than to a stronghold; EpArist 270; Jos., Ant. 12, 396) J 2:24 (EStauffer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 281–99.—Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 39a οὐ τοῖς τυχοῦσι φίλοις ἑαυτὸν ἐπίστευσεν=he did not trust himself to casual friends).—Pass. πιστεύομαί τι (B-D-F §159, 4) I am entrusted with someth. (Pla., Ep. 1, 309a; Polyb. 8, 17, 5; 31, 26, 7; Diod S 20, 19, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 136 §568 ἃ ἐπιστεύθην; ins; pap [e.g. PLond I, 121, 608 p. 203]; Jos., Bell. 5, 567, Vi. 137; Ath. 24, 3. Cp. Esth 8:12e.—Dssm., LO 320f [LAE 379]). ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:2. πεπίστευμαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον Gal 2:7 (PGM 13, 140 ὁ ὑπό σου πάντα πιστευθείς; 446); cp. 1 Th 2:4; 1 Ti 1:11.—Tit 1:3. οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι 1 Cor 9:17; cp. Dg 7:1. S. also 7:2; IMg 6:1; IPhld 9:1ab. πιστεύομαί τι παρά τινος I am entrusted by someone with someth. (Polyb. 3, 69, 1; Jos., Bell. 1, 667): οἱ πιστευθέντες παρὰ θεοῦ ἔργον τοιοῦτο 1 Cl 43:1.
    be confident about, a unique use found in ὸ̔ς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα, someth. like the one is confident about eating anything Ro 14:2 (a combination of two ideas: ‘the pers. is so strong in the faith’ and: ‘the pers. is convinced that it is permissible to eat anything’; in brief: not cultically fussy. See Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.; but also B-D-F §397, 2). Another probability is the sense
    think/consider (possible), in Ro 14:2 perh. holds everything possible; cp. J 9:18 οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they refused to entertain the possibility, and Ac 9:26. S. 4 above.—For lit. s. πίστις, end. DELG s.v. πείθομαι. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πιστεύω

  • 19 ἀπό

    ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.
    a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away from
    w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.
    w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.
    verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.
    w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.
    in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.
    as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.
    to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.
    of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.
    of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).
    α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.
    β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.
    γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.
    the beg. of a series from … (on).
    α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).
    β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.
    to indicate origin or source, from
    lit., with verbs of motion
    α. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.
    β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.
    lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.
    fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.
    fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.
    γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).
    to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).
    to indicate cause, means, or outcome
    gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).
    to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).
    to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).
    to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).
    to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, of
    α. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.
    β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.
    In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀπό

  • 20 εἰμί

    εἰμί (Hom.+) impv. ἴσθι, ἔσο IPol 4:1, ἔστω—also colloq. ἤτω (BGU 276, 24; 419, 13; POxy 533, 9; Ps 103:31; 1 Macc 10:31) 1 Cor 16:22; Js 5:12; 1 Cl 48:5; Hv 3, 3, 4;—3 pers. pl. ἔστωσαν (ins since 200 B.C. Meisterhans3-Schw. 191; PPetr III, 2, 22 [237 B.C.]) Lk 12:35; 1 Ti 3:12; GJs 7:2. Inf. εἶναι. Impf. 1 pers. only mid. ἤμην (Jos., Bell. 1, 389; 631; s. further below); ἦν only Ac 20:18 D, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Jos., Ant. 6, 104) Mt 26:69; Mk 14:67 and ἦς (Lobeck, Phryn. 149 ‘say ἦσθα’; Jos., Ant. 17, 110 al.; Sb 6262, 16 [III A.D.]) Mt 25:21, 23 al., 3 sg. ἦν, 1 pl. ἦμεν. Beside this the mid. form ἤμην (pap since III B.C.; Job 29:16; Tob 12:13 BA), s. above, gives the pl. ἤμεθα (pap since III B.C.; Bar 1:19) Mt 23:30; Ac 27:37; Eph 2:3. Both forms in succession Gal. 4:3. Fut. ἔσομαι, ptc. ἐσόμενος. The mss. vary in choice of act. or mid., but like the edd. lean toward the mid. (W-S. §14, 1; Mlt-H. 201–3; Rob. index; B-D-F §98; Rdm.2 99; 101f; Helbing 108f; Reinhold 86f). Also s. ἔνι.
    be, exist, be on hand a pred. use (for other pred. use s. 3a, 4, 5, 6, 7): of God (Epicurus in Diog. L. 10, 123 θεοί εἰσιν; Zaleucus in Diod S 12, 20, 2 θεοὺς εἶναι; Wsd 12:13; Just., D. 128, 4 angels) ἔστιν ὁ θεός God exists Hb 11:6; cp. 1 Cor 8:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν the one who is and who was (cp. SibOr 3, 16; as amulet PMich 155, 3 [II A.D.] ὁ ὢν θεὸς ὁ Ἰάω κύριος παντοκράτωρ=the god … who exists.) Rv 11:17; 16:5. ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, in this and the two preceding passages ἦν is treated as a ptc. (for the unusual use of ἦν cp. Simonides 74 D.: ἦν ἑκατὸν φιάλαι) 1:4; 4:8 (cp. Ex 3:14; Wsd 13:1; Paus. 10, 12, 10 Ζεὺς ἦν, Ζ. ἔστι, Ζ. ἔσσεται; cp. Theosophien 18. S. OWeinreich, ARW 19, 1919, 178f). οὐδʼ εἶναι θεὸν παντοκράτορα AcPlCor 1:11. ἐγώ εἰμι (ins in the Athena-Isis temple of Saïs in Plut., Is. et Os. 9, 354c: ἐγώ εἰμι πᾶν τὸ γεγονὸς κ. ὸ̓ν κ. ἐσόμενον. On the role of Isis in Gk. rel. s. IBergman, Ich bin Isis ’68; RMerkelbach, Isis Regina—Zeus Sarapis ’95; for further lit. s. MGustafson in: Prayer fr. Alexander to Constantine, ed. MKiley et al. ’97, 158.) Rv 1:8 (s. ἐγώ beg.). ὁ ὤν, … θεός Ro 9:5 is classed here and taken to mean Christ by JWordsworth ad loc. and HWarner, JTS 48, ’47, 203f. Of the λόγος: ἐν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λ. J 1:1 (for ἦν cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 4; 3, 1b ἦν σκότος, Fgm. IX 1 p. 422, 23 Sc. γέγονεν ἡ ὕλη καὶ ἦν).—Of Christ πρὶν Ἀβραὰμ γενέσθαι, ἐγὼ εἰμί before Abraham was born, I am 8:58 (on the pres. εἰμί cp. Parmenides 8, 5: of the Eternal we cannot say ἦν οὐδʼ ἔσται, only ἔστιν; Ammonius Hermiae [Comm. in Aristotl. IV 5 ed. ABusse 1897] 6 p. 172: in Timaeus we read that we must not say of the gods τὸ ἦν ἢ τὸ ἔσται μεταβολῆς τινος ὄντα σημαντικά, μόνον δὲ τὸ ἔστι=‘was’ or ‘will be’, suggesting change, but only ‘is’; Ps 89:2; DBall, ‘I Am’ in John’s Gospel [JSNT Suppl. 124] ’96).—Of the world πρὸ τοῦ τὸν κόσμον εἶναι before the world existed 17:5. Satirically, of the beast, who parodies the Lamb, ἦν καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν Rv 17:8. Of God’s temple: ἔστιν B 16:6f it exists. τὸ μὴ ὄν that which does not exist, the unreal (Sallust. 17 p. 32, 7 and 9; Philo, Aet. M. 5; 82) Hm 1:1. τὰ ὄντα that which exists contrasted w. τὰ μὴ ὄντα Ro 4:17; cp. 1 Cor 1:28; 2 Cl 1:8. Of God κτίσας ἐκ τοῦ μὴ ὄντος τὰ ὄντα what is out of what is not Hv 1, 1, 6 (on the contrast τὰ ὄντα and τὰ μὴ ὄντα cp. Ps.-Arist. on Xenophanes: Fgm. 21, 28; Artem. 1, 51 p. 49, 19 τὰ μὴ ὄντα ὡς ὄντα; Ocellus Luc. 12; Sallust. 17, 5 p. 30, 28–32, 12; Philo, Op. M. 81; PGM 4, 3077f ποιήσαντα τὰ πάντα ἐξ ὧν οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι; 13, 272f τὸν ἐκ μὴ ὄντων εἶναι ποιήσαντα καὶ ἐξ ὄντων μὴ εἶναι; Theoph. Ant. 1, 4 [p. 64, 21] τὰ πάντα ὁ θεὸς ἐποίησεν ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων εἰς τὸ εἶναι).—Of existing in the sense be present, available, provided πολλοῦ ὄχλου ὄντος since a large crowd was present Mk 8:1. ὄντων τῶν προσφερόντων those are provided who offer Hb 8:4. οὔπω ἦν πνεῦμα the Spirit had not yet come J 7:39. ἀκούσας ὄντα σιτία when he heard that grain was available Ac 7:12.—Freq. used to introduce parables and stories (once) there was: ἄνθρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος there was (once) a rich man Lk 16:1, 19. ἦν ἄνθρωπος ἐκ τ. Φαρισαίων there was a man among the Pharisees J 3:1.There is, there are ὥσπερ εἰσὶν θεοὶ πολλοί as there are many gods 1 Cor 8:5. διαιρέσεις χαρισμάτων εἰσίν there are various kinds of spiritual gifts 12:4ff; 1J 5:16 al. Neg. οὐκ ἔστι there is (are) not, no (Ps 52:2; Simplicius in Epict. p. 95, 42 as a quot. from ‘tragedy’ οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοί) δίκαιος there is no righteous man Ro 3:10 (Eccl 7:20). ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν οὐκ ἔστιν there is no resurr. of the dead 1 Cor 15:12; οὐδʼ εἶναι ἀνάστασιν AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24; cp. Mt 22:23; Ac 23:8 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14). εἰσὶν οἵ, or οἵτινες there are people who (Hom. et al.; LXX; Just., D. 47, 2 εἰ μήτι εἰσὶν οἱ λέγοντες ὅτι etc.—W. sing. and pl. combined: Arrian, Ind. 24, 9 ἔστι δὲ οἳ διέφυγον=but there are some who escaped) Mt 16:28; 19:12; Mk 9:1; Lk 9:27; J 6:64; Ac 11:20. Neg. οὐδείς ἐστιν ὅς there is no one who Mk 9:39; 10:29; Lk 1:61; 18:29. As a question τίς ἐστιν ὅς; who is there that? Mt 12:11—In an unusual (perh. bureaucratic terminology) participial construction Ac 13:1 ἡ οὖσα ἐκκλησία the congregation there (cp. Ps.-Pla., Eryx. 6, 394c οἱ ὄντες ἄνθρωποι=the people with whom he has to deal; PLond III 1168, 5 p. 136 [18 A.D.] ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις=on the adjoining areas there; PGen 49; PSI 229, 11 τοῦ ὄντος μηνός of the current month); cp. 14:13.—αἱ οὖσαι (sc. ἐξουσίαι) those that exist Ro 13:1 (cp. UPZ 180a I, 4 [113 B.C.] ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν).
    to be in close connection (with), is, freq. in statements of identity or equation, as a copula, the equative function, uniting subject and predicate. On absence of the copula, Mlt-Turner 294–310.
    gener. πραΰς εἰμι I am gentle Mt 11:29. ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριήλ Lk 1:19. σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mk 3:11; J 1:49 and very oft. ἵνα … ὁ πονηρὸς … ἐλεγχθῇ [το? s. app. in Bodm.] μὴ ὢν θεός AcPlCor 2:15 (Just., D. 3, 3 φιλολόγος οὖν τις εἶ σύ).—The pred. can be supplied fr. the context: καὶ ἐσμέν and we are (really God’s children) 1J 3:1 (Eur., Ion 309 τ. θεοῦ καλοῦμαι δοῦλος εἰμί τε. Dio Chrys. 14 [31], 58 θεοφιλεῖς οἱ χρηστοὶ λέγονται καὶ εἰσίν; Epict. 2, 16, 44 Ἡρακλῆς ἐπιστεύθη Διὸς υἱὸς εἶναι καὶ ἦν.—The ptc. ὤν, οὖσα, ὄν used w. a noun or adj.and serving as an if-, since-, or although-clause sim. functions as a copula πονηροὶ ὄντες Mt 7:11; 12:34.—Lk 20:36; J 3:4; 4:9; Ac 16:21; Ro 5:10; 1 Cor 8:7; Gal 2:3 al.).—W. adv. of quality: οὕτως εἶναι be so preceded by ὥσπερ, καθώς or followed by ὡς, ὥσπερ Mt 13:40; 24:27, 37, 39; Mk 4:26; Lk 17:26. W. dat. of pers. οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς τ. ἀ. τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ so the Human One (Son of Man) will be for this generation 11:30. εἰμὶ ὡσ/ὥσπερ I am like Mt 6:5; Lk 18:11. W. dat. ἔστω σοι ὥσπερ τελώνης he shall be to you as a tax-collector Mt 18:17. εἰμὶ ὥς τις I am like someone of outward and inward similarity 28:3; Lk 6:40; 11:44; 22:27 al. καθώς εἰμι as I am Ac 22:3; 1J 3:2, 7; 4:17.—W. demonstr. pron. (Just., A I, 16, 1 ἃ ἔφη, ταῦτά ἐστι: foll. by a quotation; sim. 48, 5 ἔστι δὲ ταῦτα; and oft.) τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ μαρτυρία J 1:19. W. inf. foll. θρησκεία αὕτη ἐστίν, ἐπισκέπτεσθαι Js 1:27. W. ὅτι foll. αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυθεν J 3:19; cp. 21:24; 1J 1:5; 3:11; 5:11. W. ἵνα foll. τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἔργον, ἵνα πιστεύητε J 6:29; cp. vs. 39f; 15:12; 17:3; 1J 3:11, 23; 5:3. W. τηλικοῦτος: τὰ πλοῖα, τηλικαῦτα ὄντα though they are so large Js 3:4. W. τοσοῦτος: τοσοῦτων ὄντων although there were so many J 21:11. W. τοιοῦτος: τοιοῦτος ὤν Phlm 9 (cp. Just., A I, 18, 4 ὅσα ἄλλα τοιαῦτά ἐστι).—W. interrog. pron. ὑμεῖς τίνα με λέγετε εἶναι; who do you say I am? Mt 16:15; cp. 21:10; Mk 1:24; 4:41; 8:27, 29; Lk 4:34 al.; σὺ τίς εἶ; J 1:19; 8:25; 21:12 al. (cp. JosAs 14:6 τίς εἶ συ tell me ‘who you are’). σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ κρίνων; (Pla., Gorg. 452b; Strabo 6, 2, 4 σὺ τίς εἶ ὁ τὸν Ὅμηρον ψέγων ὡς μυθογράφον;) Ro 14:4; ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην; (cp. Ex 3:11) Ac 11:17; τίς εἰμι ἐγὼ ὅτι who am I, that GJs 12:2 (Ex 3:11). W. πόσος: πόσος χρόνος ἐστίν; how long a time? Mk 9:21. W. ποταπός of what sort Lk 1:29.—W. relative pron. οἷος 2 Cor 10:11; ὁποῖος Ac 26:29; 1 Cor 3:13; Gal 2:6; ὅς Rv 1:19; ὅστις Gal 5:10, 19.—W. numerals ἦσαν οἱ φαγόντες πεντακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 6:44 (cp. Polyaenus 7, 25 ἦσαν οἱ πεσόντες ἀνδρῶν μυριάδες δέκα); cp. Ac 19:7; 23:13. Λάζαρος εἷς ἦν ἐκ τῶν ἀνακειμένων L. was one of those at the table J 12:2; cp. Gal 3:20; Js 2:19. τῶν πιστευσάντων ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία Ac 4:32. εἷς εἶναι be one and the same Gal 3:28. ἓν εἶναι be one J 10:30; 17:11, 21ff; 1 Cor 3:8.—οὐδʼ εἶναι τὴν πλάσιν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων τοῦ θεοῦ (that) the creation of humankind is not God’s doing AcPlCor 1:13.—To establish identity the formula ἐγώ εἰμι is oft. used in the gospels (corresp. to Hebr. אֲנִי הוּא Dt 32:39; Is 43:10), in such a way that the predicate must be understood fr. the context: Mt 14:27; Mk 6:50; 13:6; 14:62; Lk 22:70; J 4:26; 6:20; 8:24, 28; 13:19; 18:5f and oft.; s. on ἐγώ.—In a question μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι; surely it is not I? Mt 26:22, 25.
    to describe a special connection betw. the subject and a predicate noun ἡμεῖς ναὸς θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος we are a temple of the living God 2 Cor 6:16. ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are our letter (of recommendation) 3:2. σφραγίς μου τῆς ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε you are the seal of my apostleship 1 Cor 9:2 and oft.
    in explanations:
    α. to show how someth. is to be understood is a representation of, is the equivalent of; εἰμί here, too, serves as copula; we usually translate mean, so in the formula τοῦτʼ ἔστιν this or that means, that is to say (Epict., Ench. 33, 10; Arrian, Tact. 29, 3; SIG 880, 50; PFlor 157, 4; PSI 298, 9; PMert 91, 9; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 16; ApcMos 19; Just., D. 56, 23; 78, 3 al.) Mk 7:2; Ac 19:4; Ro 7:18; 9:8; 10:6, 8; Phlm 12; Hb 7:5 al.; in the sense that is (when translated) (Polyaenus 8, 14, 1 Μάξιμος ἀνηγορεύθη• τοῦτο δʼ ἄν εἴη Μέγιστον) Mt 27:46; Ac 1:19. So also w. relative pron.: ὅ ἐστιν Mk 3:17; 7:11, 34; Hb 7:2. After verbs of asking, recognizing, knowing and not knowing (Antiphanes Com. 231, 1f τὸ ζῆν τί ἐστι;) μάθετε τί ἐστιν learn what (this) means Mt 9:13. εἰ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν 12:7; cp. Mk 1:27; 9:10; Lk 20:17; J 16:17f; Eph 4:9. W. an indir. question (Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ἀγύλλα: τὶς ἠρώτα τί ἂν εἴη τὸ ὄνομα) τί ἂν εἴη ταῦτα Lk 15:26; τί εἴη τοῦτο 18:36. τίνα θέλει ταῦτα εἶναι what this means Ac 17:20; cp. 2:12, where the question is not about the mng. of terms but the significance of what is happening.—Esp. in interpr. of the parables (Artem. 1, 51 p. 48, 26 ἄρουρα οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν ἢ γυνή=field means nothing else than woman) ὁ ἀγρός ἐστιν ὁ κόσμος the field means the world Mt 13:38; cp. vss. 19f, 22f; Mk 4:15f, 18, 20; Lk 8:11ff (cp. Gen 41:26f; Ezk 37:11; Ath. 22, 4 [Stoic interpr. of myths]). On τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ σῶμά μου Mt 26:26; Mk 14:22; Lk 22:19 and its various interpretations, see lit. s.v. εὐχαριστία. Cp. Hipponax (VI B.C.) 45 Diehl αὕτη γάρ ἐστι συμφορή=this means misfortune.
    β. to be of relative significance, be of moment or importance, amount to someth. w. indef. pron. εἰδωλόθυτόν τί ἐστιν meat offered to idols means anything 1 Cor 10:19. Esp. εἰμί τι I mean someth. of pers. 1 Cor 3:7; Gal 2:6; 6:3; and of things vs. 15. εἰμί τις Ac 5:36.—Of no account ἐμοὶ εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν (telescoped fr. ἐλάχ. ἐστιν and εἰς ἐλάχ. γίνεται, of which there are many exx. in Schmid, I 398; II 161, 237; III 281; IV 455) it is of little or no importance to me 1 Cor 4:3.
    be in reference to location, persons, condition, or time, be
    of various relations or positions involving a place or thing: w. ἀπό: εἶναι ἀπό τινος be or come from a certain place (X., An. 2, 4, 13) J 1:44.—W. ἐν: ἐν τοῖς τ. πατρός μου in my father’s house Lk 2:49 (cp. Jos., Ant. 16, 302 καταγωγὴ ἐν τοῖς Ἀντιπάτρου). ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ on the way Mk 10:32. ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ Mt 24:26. ἐν ἀγρῷ Lk 15:25. ἐν δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ at God’s right hand Ro 8:34; in heaven Eph 6:9.—W. εἰς: τὴν κοίτην Lk 11:7; τὸν κόλπον J1:18.—W. ἐπὶ w. gen. be on someth. of place, roof Lk 17:31; head J 20:7 (cp. 1 Macc 1:59); also fig., of one who is over someone (1 Macc 10:69; Jdth 14:13 ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων τῶν αὐτοῦ) Ro 9:5 (of the angel of death Mel., P. 20, 142 ἐπὶ τῶν πρωτοτόκων); also ἐπάνω τινός J 3:31.—W. dat. be at someth. the door Mt 24:33; Mk 13:29.—W. acc. be on someone: grace Lk 2:40; Ac 4:33; spirit (Is 61:1) Lk 2:25; εἶναι ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό be in the same place, together (Gen 29:2 v.l.) Ac 1:15; 2:1, 44; 1 Cor 7:5.—W. κατά w. acc. εἶναι κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν be in Judea Ac 11:1; εἶναι ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ κατὰ τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν were at Antioch in the congregation there 13:1.—W. ὑπό w. acc. τι or τινα of place be under someth. J 1:48; 1 Cor 10:1.—W. παρά w. acc. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν by the sea- (i.e. lake-) shore Mk 5:21; Ac 10:6.—W. πρός τι be close to, facing someth. Mk 4:1.—W. adv. of place ἐγγύς τινι near someth. Ac 9:38; 27:8. μακρὰν (ἀπό) Mk 12:34; J 21:8; Eph 2:13; also πόρρω Lk 14:32. χωρίς τινος without someth. Hb 12:8. ἐνθάδε Ac 16:28. ἔσω J 20:26. ἀπέναντί τινος Ro 3:18 (Ps 35:2). ἐκτός τινος 1 Cor 6:18; ἀντίπερά τινος Lk 8:26; ὁμοῦ J 21:2; οὗ Mt 2:9; ὅπου Mk 2:4; 5:40. ὧδε Mt 17:4; Mk 9:5; Lk 9:33. Also w. fut. mng. (ESchwartz, GGN 1908, 161 n.; on the fut. use of the pres. cp. POxy 531, 22 [II A.D.] ἔστι δὲ τοῦ Τῦβι μηνὸς σοὶ ὸ̔ θέλεις) ὅπου εἰμί J 7:34, 36; 12:26; 14:3; 17:24. As pred., to denote a relatively long stay at a place, stay, reside ἴσθι ἐκεῖ stay there Mt 2:13, cp. vs. 15; ἐπʼ ἐρήμοις τόποις in lonely places Mk 1:45; ἦν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν he stayed by the lakeside 5:21.
    involving humans or transcendent beings: w. adv. ἔμπροσθέν τινος Lk 14:2. ἔναντί τινος Ac 8:21; ἐνώπιόν τινος Lk 14:10; Ac 4:19; 1 Pt 3:4; Rv 7:15; ἐντός τινος Lk 17:21; ἐγγύς τινος J 11:18; 19:20; Ro 10:8 (Dt 30:14).—W. prep. ἐν τινί equiv. to ἔκ τινος εἶναι be among Mt 27:56; cp. Mk 15:40; Ro 1:6. Of God, who is among his people 1 Cor 14:25 (Is 45:14; Jer 14:9); of the Spirit J 14:17. Of persons under Christ’s direction: ἐν θεῷ 1J 2:5; 5:20 (s. Norden, Agn. Th. 23, 1). ἔν τινι rest upon, arise from someth. (Aristot., Pol. 7, 1, 3 [1323b, 1] ἐν ἀρετῇ; Sir 9:16) Ac 4:12; 1 Cor 2:5; Eph 5:18.—εἴς τινα be directed, inclined toward Ac 23:30; 2 Cor 7:15; 1 Pt 1:21.—κατά w. gen. be against someone (Sir 6:12) Mt 12:30; Mk 9:40 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. ὑπέρ); Gal 5:23.—σύν τινι be with someone (Jos., Ant. 7, 181) Lk 22:56; 24:44; Ac 13:7; accompany, associate w. someone Lk 8:38; Ac 4:13; 22:9; take sides with someone (X., Cyr. 5, 4, 37; 7, 5, 77; Jos., Ant. 11, 259 [of God]) Ac 14:4.—πρός τινα be with someone Mt 13:56; Mk 6:3; J 1:1f. I am to be compared w. IMg 12.—μετά and gen. be with someone (Judg 14:11) Mt 17:17; Mk 3:14; 5:18; J 3:26; 12:17; ἔστω μεθʼ ὑμῶν εἰρήνη AcPlCor 2:40; of God, who is with someone (Gen 21:20; Judg 6:13 al.; Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 4; Jos., Ant. 6, 181; 15, 138) Lk 1:66; J 3:2; 8:29; Ac 10:38 al.; also be with in the sense be favorable to, in league with (Ex 23:2) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23; of punishment attending a pers. τὸ πῦρ ἐστι μετʼ αὐτοῦ AcPlCor 2:37.—παρά and gen. come from someone (X., An. 2, 4, 15; Just., D. 8, 4 ἔλεος παρὰ θεοῦ) fr. God J 6:46; 7:29; w. dat. be with, among persons Mt 22:25; Ac 10:6. W. neg. be strange to someone, there is no … in someone Ro 2:11; 9:14; Eph 6:9.—ὑπέρ w. gen. be on one’s side Mk 9:4 and Lk 9:50 (both opp. κατά); w. acc. be superior to (Sir 25:10; 30:16) Lk 6:40.
    of condition or circumstance: κατά w. acc. live in accordance with (Sir 28:10; 43:8; 2 Macc 9:20) κατὰ σάκρα, πνεῦμα Ro 8:5. οὐκ ἔστιν κατὰ ἄνθρωπον not human (in origin) Gal 1:11.—Fig. ὑπό w. acc. be under (the power of) someth. Ro 3:9; 6:14f; Gal 3:10, 25.—W. ἐν of existing ἐν τῷ θεῷ εἶναι of humankind: have its basis of existence in God Ac 17:28. Of states of being: ἐν δόξῃ 2 Cor 3:8; ἐν εἰρήνῃ Lk 11:21; ἐν ἔχθρᾳ at enmity 23:12; ἐν κρίματι under condemnation vs. 40. ἐν ῥύσει αἵματος suffer from hemorrhages Mk 5:25; Lk 8:43 (cp. Soph., Aj. 271 ἦν ἐν τῇ νόσῳ; cp. TestJob 35:1 ἐν πληγαῖς πολλαῖς). Periphrastically for an adj. ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ authoritative Lk 4:32. ἐν βάρει important 1 Th 2:7. ἐν τῇ πίστει true believers, believing 2 Cor 13:5. Be involved in someth. ἐν ἑορτῇ be at the festival=take part in it J 2:23. ἐν τούτοις ἴσθι devote yourself to these things 1 Ti 4:15 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 8, 7 ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες=occupied w. such things; Jos., Ant. 2, 346 ἐν ὕμνοις ἦσαν=they occupied themselves w. the singing of hymns).—Fig., live in the light 1J 2:9; cp. vs. 11; 1 Th 5:4; in the flesh Ro 7:5; 8:8; AcPlCor 1:6. ἐν οἷς εἰμι in the situation in which I find myself Phil 4:11 (X., Hell. 4, 2, 1; Diod S 12, 63, 5; 12, 66, 4; Appian, Hann. 55 §228 ἐν τούτοις ἦν=he was in this situation; Jos., Ant. 7, 232 ἐν τούτοις ἦσαν=found themselves in this sit.; TestJob 35:6 ἐν τίνι ἐστίν; s. ZPE VIII 170). ἐν πολλοῖς ὢν ἀστοχήμασι AcPlCor 2:1. Of characteristics, emotions, etc. ἔν τινί ἐστιν, e.g. ἀδικία J 7:18; ἄγνοια Eph 4:18; ἀλήθεια J 8:44; 2 Cor 11:10 (cp. 1 Macc 7:18); ἁμαρτία 1J 3:5.
    of time ἐγγύς of καιρός be near Mt 26:18; Mk 13:28. πρὸς ἑσπέραν ἐστίν it is toward evening Lk 24:29 (Just., D. 137, 4 πρὸς δυσμὰς … ὁ ἥλιός ἐστι).
    to be alive in a period of time, live, denoting temporal existence (Hom., Trag., Thu. et al.; Sir 42:21; En 102:5 Philo, De Jos. 17; Jos., Ant. 7, 254) εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers Mt 23:30. ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν because they were no more 2:18 (Jer 38:15). ἦσαν ἐπὶ χρόνον ἱκανόν (those who were healed and raised by Christ) remained alive for quite some time Qua.
    to be the time at which someth. takes place w. indications of specific moments or occasions, be (X., Hell. 4, 5, 1, An. 4, 3, 8; Sus 13 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:49; 2 Macc 8:26; Jos., Ant. 6, 235 νουμηνία δʼ ἦν; 11, 251): ἦν ὥρα ἕκτη it was the sixth hour (=noon acc. to Jewish reckoning) Lk 23:44; J 4:6; 19:14.—Mk 15:25; J 1:39. ἦν ἑσπέρα ἤδη it was already evening Ac 4:3. πρωί̈ J 18:28. ἦν παρασκευή Mk 15:42. ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων J 5:1. σάββατόν ἐστιν vs. 10 et al. Short clauses (as Polyaenus 4, 9, 2 νὺξ ἦν; 7, 44, 2 πόλεμος ἦν; exc. 36, 8 ἦν ἀρίστου ὥρα; Jos., Ant. 19, 248 ἔτι δὲ νὺξ ἦν) χειμὼν ἦν J 10:22; ἦν δὲ νύξ (sim. Jos., Bell. 4, 64) 13:30; ψύχος it was cold 18:18; καύσων ἔσται it will be hot Lk 12:55.
    to take place as a phenomenon or event, take place, occur, become, be, be in (Hom., Thu. et al.; LXX; En 104:5; 106:6.—Cp. Just., D. 82, 2 of Christ’s predictions ὅπερ καὶ ἔστι ‘which is in fact the case’.) ἔσται θόρυβος τοῦ λαοῦ a popular uprising Mk 14:2. γογγυσμὸς ἦν there was (much) muttering J 7:12. σχίσμα there was a division 9:16; 1 Cor 1:10; 12:25. ἔριδες … εἰσίν quarrels are going on 1:11. δεῖ αἱρέσεις εἶναι 11:19. θάνατος, πένθος, κραυγή, πόνος ἔσται Rv 21:4. ἔσονται λιμοὶ κ. σεισμοί Mt 24:7. Hence τὸ ἐσόμενον what was going to happen (Sir 48:25) Lk 22:49. πότε ταῦτα ἔσται; when will this happen? Mt 24:3. πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο; how can this be? Lk 1:34. Hebraistically (הָיָה; s. KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT, ’62, 63–65) καὶ ἔσται w. fut. of another verb foll. and it will come about that Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 3:23 (w. δέ); Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1).—W. dat. ἐστί τινι happen, be granted, come, to someone (X., An. 2, 1, 10; Jos., Ant. 11, 255; Just., D. 8, 4 σοὶ … ἔλεος ἔσται παρὰ θεοῦ) Mt 16:22; Mk 11:24; Lk 2:10; GJs 1:1; 4:3; 8:3; τί ἐστίν σοι τοῦτο, ὅτι what is the matter with you, that GJs 17:2.—Of becoming or turning into someth. become someth. εἰς χολὴν πικρίας εἶναι become bitter gall Ac 8:23. εἰς σάρκα μίαν Mt 19:5; Mk 10:8; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (all Gen 2:24. Cp. Syntipas p. 42, 24 οὐκ ἔτι ἔσομαι μετὰ σοῦ εἰς γυναῖκα); τὰ σκολιὰ εἰς εὐθείας Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4); εἰς πατέρα 2 Cor 6:18; Hb 1:5 (2 Km 7:14; 1 Ch 22:10; 28:6); εἰς τὸ ἕν 1J 5:8. Serve as someth. (IPriene 50, 39 [c. II B.C.] εἶναι εἰς φυλακὴν τ. πόλεως; Aesop., Fab. 28 H.=18 P.; 26 Ch.; 18 H-H. εἰς ὠφέλειαν; Gen 9:13; s. also εἰς 4d) 1 Cor 14:22; Col 2:22; Js 5:3.—Of something being ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται it will be more tolerable τινί for someone Lk 10:12, 14.
    to exist as possibility ἔστιν w. inf. foll. it is possible, one can (Περὶ ὕψους 6; Diog. L. 1, 110 ἔστιν εὑρεῖν=one can find; Just., A I, 59, 10 ἔστι ταῦτα ἀκοῦσαι καὶ μαθεῖν; D. 42, 3 ἰδεῖν al.; Mel., P. 19, 127); neg. οὐκ ἔστιν νῦν λέγειν it is not possible to speak at this time Hb 9:5. οὐκ ἔστιν φαγεῖν it is impossible to eat 1 Cor 11:20 (so Hom. et al.; UPZ 70, 23 [152/151 B.C.] οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαι με πώποτε … ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης; 4 Macc 13:5; Wsd 5:10; Sir 14:16; 18:6; EpJer 49 al.; EpArist 163; Jos., Ant. 2, 335; Ath. 22, 3 ἔστιν εἰπεῖν).
    to have a point of derivation or origin, be,/come from somewhere ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Ἡρῴδου from Herod’s jurisdiction Lk 23:7; ἐκ Ναζαρέτ (as an insignificant place) J 1:46; ἐκ τῆς γῆς 3:31; ἐκ γυναικός 1 Cor 11:8 al. ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, ἐξ ἀνθρώπων be of heavenly (divine), human descent Mt 21:25; Mk 11:30; Lk 20:4. Be generated by (cp. Sb 8141, 21f [ins I B.C.] οὐδʼ ἐκ βροτοῦ ἤεν ἄνακτος, ἀλλὰ θεοῦ μεγάλου ἔκγονος; En 106:6) Mt 1:20. Esp. in Johannine usage ἐκ τοῦ διαβόλου εἶναι originate from the devil J 8:44; 1J 3:8. ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ 3:12; ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου J 15:19; 17:14, 16; 1J 4:5. ἐκ τῆς ἀληθείας εἶναι 2:21; J 18:37 etc. Cp. 9 end.
    to belong to someone or someth. through association or genetic affiliation, be, belong w. simple gen. (X., Hell. 2, 4, 36; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 33, 230 τῶν Πυθαγορείων) οἱ τῆς ὁδοῦ ὄντες those who belong to the Way Ac 9:2. εἰμὶ Παύλου I belong to Paul 1 Cor 1:12; 3:4; cp. Ro 8:9; 2 Cor 10:7; 1 Ti 1:20; Ac 23:6. ἡμέρας εἶναι belong to the day 1 Th 5:8, cp. vs. 5. W. ἔκ τινος 1 Cor 12:15f; Mt 26:73; Mk 14:69f; Lk 22:58 al. (cp. X., Mem. 3, 6, 17; oft LXX). ἐκ τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ τῶν δώδεκα belong to the twelve 22:3. ὅς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν who is a fellow-countryman of yours Col 4:9.—To belong through origin 2 Cor 4:7. Of Mary: ἦν τῆς φυλῆς τοῦ Δαυίδ was of David’s line GJs 10:1. Cp. 8 above.
    to have someth. to do with someth. or someone, be. To denote a close relationship ἐξ ἔργων νόμου εἶναι rely on legal performance Gal 3:10. ὁ νόμος οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ πίστεως the law has nothing to do with faith vs. 12.—To denote a possessor Mt 5:3, 10; l9:14; Mk 12:7; Lk 18:16; 1 Cor 6:19. Esp. of God who owns the Christian Ac 27:23; 1 Cor 3:23; 2 Ti 2:19 (Num 16:5). οὐδʼ εἶναι τὸν κόσμον θεοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀγγέλων AcPlCor 1:15 (cp. Just., A II, 13, 4 ὅσα … καλῶς εἴρηται, ἡμῶν τῶν χριστιανῶν ἐστι).—W. possess. pron. ὑμετέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία Lk 6:20. οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι Mk 10:40 (cp. Just., A I, 4, 2 ὑμέτερον ἀγωνιᾶσαί ἐστι ‘it is a matter for your concern’).—To denote function (X., An. 2, 1, 4) οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν it is no concern of yours Ac 1:7—Of quality παιδεία οὐ δοκεῖ χαρᾶς εἶναι discipline does not seem to be (partake of) joy Hb 12:11.—10:39.
    as an auxiliary: very commonly the simple tense forms are replaced by the periphrasis εἶναι and the ptc. (B-D-F §352–55; Mlt. 225–27, 249; Mlt-H. 451f; Rdm.2 102, 105, 205; Kühner-G. I 38ff; Rob. 374–76, 1119f; CTurner, Marcan Usage: JTS 28, 1927 349–51; GKilpatrick, BT 7, ’56, 7f; very oft. LXX).
    (as in Hom et al.) w. the pf. ptc. to express the pf., plpf. and fut. pf. act. and pass. (s. Mayser 329; 377) ἦσαν ἐληλυθότες they had come Lk 5:17. ἦν αὐτῶν ἡ καρδία πεπωρωμένη their hearts were hardened Mk 6:52. ἠλπικότες ἐσμέν we have set our hope 1 Cor 15:19. ὁ καιρὸς συνεσταλμένος ἐστίν the time has become short 7:29. ἦν ἑστώς (En 12:3) he was standing (more exactly he took his stand) Lk 5:1.
    w. pres. ptc. (B-D-F §353).
    α. to express the pres. ἐστὶν προσαναπληροῦσα τὰ ὑστερήματα supplies the wants 2 Cor 9:12 (Just., A I, 26, 5 Μαρκίων … καὶ νῦν ἔτι ἐστὶ διδάσκων; Mel., P. 61, 441 ἐστὶν … κηρυσσόμενον).
    β. impf. or aor. ἦν καθεύδων he was sleeping Mk 4:38. ἦσαν ἀναβαίνοντες … ἦν προάγων 10:32; cp. Lk 1:22; 5:17; 11:14 al. (JosAs 1:3 ἦν συνάγων τὸν σίτον; Mel., P. 80, 580 ἦσθα εὐφραινόμενος). ἦν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλήθινόν … ἐρχόμενον εἰς τὸν κόσμον the true light entered the world J 1:9, w. ἦν introducing a statement in dramatic contrast to the initial phrase of vs. 8.—To denote age (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 2 al. Jac.; POxy 275, 9 [66 A.D.] οὐδέπω ὄντα τῶν ἐτῶν; Tob 14:11) Mk 5:42; Lk 3:23; Ac 4:22; GJs 12:3.—Mussies 304–6.
    γ. fut. ἔσῃ σιωπῶν you will be silent Lk 1:20; cp. 5:10; Mt 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17, 24 al.; 2 Cl 17:7 Bihlm. (the child) shall serve him (God).
    w. aor. ptc. as plpf. (Aelian, NA 7, 11; Hippiatr. 34, 14, vol. I p. 185, 3 ἦν σκευάσας; ISyriaW 2070b ἦν κτίσας; AcThom 16; 27 [Aa II/2 p. 123, 2f; p. 142, 10]; B-D-F §355 m.—JVogeser, Z. Sprache d. griech. Heiligenlegenden, diss. Munich 1907, 14; JWittmann, Sprachl. Untersuchungen zu Cosmas Indicopleustes, diss. Munich 1913, 20; SPsaltes, Gramm. d. byzant. Chroniken 1913, 230; Björck [διδάσκω end] 75; B-D-F §355). ἦν βληθείς had been thrown Lk 23:19; J 18:30 v.l.—GPt 6:23; 12:51. (Cp. Just., A II, 10, 2 διʼ εὑρέσεως … ἐστὶ πονηθέντα αὐτοῖς ‘they achieved through investigation’).
    Notice esp. the impersonals δέον ἐστίν it is necessary (Pla. et al.; POxy 727, 19; Sir praef. ln. 3; 1 Macc 12:11 δέον ἐστὶν καὶ πρέπον) Ac 19:36; εἰ δέον ἐστίν if it must be 1 Pt 1:6 (s. δεῖ 2a); 1 Cl 34:2; πρέπον ἐστίν it is appropriate (Pla. et al.; POxy 120, 24; 3 Macc 7:13) Mt 3:15; 1 Cor 11:13.
    In many cases the usage w. the ptc. serves to emphasize the duration of an action or condition (BGU 183, 25 ἐφʼ ὸ̔ν χρόνον ζῶσα ᾖ Σαταβούς); JosAs 2:1 ἦν … ἐξουθενοῦσα καὶ καταπτύουσα πάντα ἄνδρα). ἦν διδάσκων he customarily taught Mk 1:22; Lk 4:31; 19:47. ἦν θέλων he cherished the wish 23:8. ἦσαν νηστεύοντες they were keeping the fast Mk 2:18. ἦσαν συλλαλοῦντες they were conversing for a while 9:4. ἦν προσδεχόμενος he was waiting for (the kgdm.) 15:43. ἦν συγκύπτουσα she was bent over Lk 13:11.
    to emphasize the adjectival idea inherent in the ptc. rather than the concept of action expressed by the finite verb ζῶν εἰμι I am alive Rv 1:18. ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος he was obedient Lk 2:51. ἦν ἔχων κτήματα πολλά he was very rich Mt 19:22; Mk 10:22. ἴσθι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων you shall have authority Lk 19:17 (Lucian, Tim. 35 ἴσθι εὐδαιμονῶν). ἦν καταλλάσσων (God) was reconciling 2 Cor 5:19 (cp. Mel., P. 83, 622 οὗτος ἦν ὁ ἐκλεξάμενός σε; Ath. 15, 2 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ … καρπούμενος).—LMcGaughy, Toward a Descriptive Analysis of ΕΙΝΑΙ as a Linking Verb in the Gk. NT, diss. Vanderbilt, ’70 (s. esp. critique of treatment of εἰμί in previous edd. of this lexicon pp. 12–15).—Mlt. 228. B. 635. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰμί

См. также в других словарях:

  • For Whom the Bell Tolls — infobox Book | name = For Whom the Bell Tolls title orig = translator = image caption = First edition cover author = Ernest Hemingway cover artist = country = United States language = English series = genre = War novel publisher = Charles… …   Wikipedia

  • Not in Our Name — For the Charlie Haden Liberation Music Orchestra album, see Not in Our Name (album). Not in Our Name (NION) was a United States organization founded on March 23, 2002 to protest the U.S. government s course in the wake of the September 11, 2001… …   Wikipedia

  • Not I — This article is about the play. For the restriction enzyme NotI, see restriction enzyme. Photo of Lisa Dwan, Battersea Arts Centre © Allan Titmuss Not I is a twenty minute dramatic monologue written in 1972 (March 20 to April 1) by Samuel Beckett …   Wikipedia

  • Prayers for the Dead — • Catholic teaching regarding prayers for the dead is bound up inseparably with the doctrine of purgatory and the more general doctrine of the communion of the saints, which is an article of the Apostle s Creed Catholic Encyclopedia. Kevin Knight …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • Not One Less — Not One Less …   Wikipedia

  • Whom the Gods Would Destroy — is a novel written by Richard P. Powell. It was published in 1970 by Charles Scribner s Sons, NY. The title is currently out of print.The story is narrated through the point of view of a young boy named Helios who grows up during the Trojan… …   Wikipedia

  • Center for Progressive Christianity — The Center for Progressive Christianity (TCPC) was founded in 1996 by a retired Episcopalian priest, James Rowe Adams, in Cambridge, MA. It is possibly the most progressive established Christian group within American Christianity. It is not a… …   Wikipedia

  • Not Drowning, Waving — Origin Melbourne, Victoria, Australia Genres Rock, ambient, world Years active 1983 (1983)–1994 (1994), 1996, 2001, 2003, 2 …   Wikipedia

  • Market for loyalties theory — is a media theory based upon neoclassical economics. It describes why governments and power holders monopolize radio, satellite, internet and other media through censorship using regulations, technology and other controls. It has also been used… …   Wikipedia

  • For Fatherland and Freedom/LNNK — Tēvzemei un Brīvībai/LNNK Leader Roberts Zīle Founded TB: 1 February 1993 …   Wikipedia

  • Not My Business — is a free verse poem by Niyi Osundare. It is included in Cluster 2, Poems from Different Cultures, of the AQA Anthology. Description In Not My Business, the people around the voice of the poem are unjustly taken in Nigeria, but the voice says… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»